JP5679476B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, a plurality of variable information that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the start condition being satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. A variable display device having a display unit, and after a variable display result of identification information sequentially derived and displayed by a plurality of variable display units becomes a predetermined specific display result, a specific gaming state advantageous to a player is obtained. It relates to a gaming machine to be controlled.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it can be changed by displaying predetermined identification information (hereinafter referred to as a display symbol) on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as “LCD”) by updating or scrolling. There are a number of games that have been enhanced by a so-called variable display game that performs variable display and determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result.

  Some variable display games are played by using the above display device as an image display device. In such a variable display game, the change of the display symbol is started based on the detection of the game ball passing through the start winning opening (the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied), and the stop when the change of the display symbol is completely stopped. A game in which a case of a symbol (determined symbol) is a specific display mode is a “big hit”. When a “big hit” occurs in the variable display game, a special electric combination called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state in which a game ball can be won extremely easily is provided to a player for a certain period of time. This state is referred to as “specific game state” or “hit game state”.

  As such a gaming machine, there has been proposed one in which display control is performed for switching the reach display mode at a randomly determined reach switching timing after the variable display of the display symbols has reached the reach display mode (for example, patents). Reference 1).

JP 2003-325858 A (paragraphs 0077, 0101, 0107, etc.)

  According to the technique described in Patent Document 1, in order to switch the reach display mode, the variable display of the display symbol must be the reach display mode. For this reason, it becomes difficult to increase the expectation for the variable display result of “big hit” before the reach display mode.

  Even when the reach display mode is switched, the variable display result may not be “big hit”. Therefore, even if various presentation operations are performed, there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be reduced without obtaining a “big hit” variable display result.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of the effect by switching the effect operation and improve the interest of the game.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the claims of the present application provides a variable display device (for example, the image display device 5) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can be identified. ) After the variable display result of the identification information derived and displayed becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination), the specific gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player Pre-determining means (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that determines whether to control to the specific gaming state before the variable display result of the identification information is derived and displayed (for example, CPU103 and the like portions for performing the process of step S250), the variable display pattern storage means for storing a variable display pattern of multiple (e.g. loss fluctuation pattern setting Te A bull like 141A and jackpot fluctuation pattern setting table 141B～141D), on the basis of the by that determination result to advance determining means, variable display pattern selection you select one of the plurality of variable display pattern Means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S261 to S274) and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect operation corresponding to the variable display pattern selected by the variable display pattern selection means). portion and to perform the effect control process processing in step S406, the display control unit 123, voice control board 13, such as a lamp control board 14) and provided with a front Symbol variable display pattern of the plurality of variable display stored in the storage means All production big hits are possible for the pattern. Display patterns (for example, variation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5-1 to PA5-3, PA6-1 to PA6-5, PA7-1, PA7-2, PA8-1 to PA8-3, PA9-1 to PA9-1) and PA9-5, etc.), at a predetermined effect switching timing in the variable display in the previous SL identification information, by the total effect jackpot variable display pattern from the effect operation the same effect operation by the total effect jackpot variable display pattern switches to the specific effect different from the effect operation, sudden displays derive a specific display result jackpot variable display pattern (e.g. variation pattern PT1-1~PT1-4, PT2-1~PT2-7, PT3-1~PT3-6 Etc., and the sudden big hit variable display pattern allows for a sudden big hit before reaching the effect switching timing before the reach state is reached. Change display patterns (for example, change patterns PT1-1 to PT1-4, PT2-1, PT2-3 to PT2-5, PT2-7, PT3-1, PT3-3, PT3-4, etc.) and reach state A plurality of sudden jackpot variable display patterns including a post-reach sudden jackpot variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PT2-2, PT2-6, PT3-2, PT3-5, PT3-6, etc.) that become the effect switching timing after There is a pattern, and the specific game state includes at least a first specific game state and a second specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game state, and variable display by the sudden big hit variable display pattern Is executed at a higher rate than when the variable display by the all-effects jackpot variable display pattern is executed, the second specific gaming state is controlled. .

In such a configuration, a reach before sudden jackpot variable display pattern, switched specific display results specific effect becomes effect switching timing before the reach state is Ru derived displayed. Furthermore, the reach after sudden jackpot variable display pattern, the specific effect on the switched specific display result becomes effect switching timing after a reach state is Ru derived displayed. Thereby, when the effect operation is switched to the specific effect, the specific display result is derived and displayed, and the unexpectedness of being the specific display result can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since it is switched to the specific effect even before reaching the reach state, it is possible to enhance the expectation that the specific display result will be obtained over the entire period during which the identification information is variably displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1), the player includes operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effect executing means is operated within the operation effective period during the operation promotion effect by the sudden big hit variable display pattern. After switching to the specific effect at the operated timing and deriving and displaying a specific display result when the specific effect ends, the identification information can be changed by the predetermined sudden hit variable display pattern. The derivation display of the specific display result may be continued until the display time elapses.
(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) may further include a notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect for notifying the possibility of being controlled to the specific gaming state.
(4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the effect executing means can execute a reach notice effect for notifying that the reach state is reached before the reach state is reached ( For example, in the sudden big hit variable display pattern, the timing at which the reach notice effect is executed is referred to as the effect switching timing in the sudden big hit variable display pattern. It may be configured to include a sudden big hit variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PT1-2, PT1-3, etc.) at the time of reach notice.

  In such a configuration, it is possible to switch to the specific effect at the timing when the reach notice effect is executed, and to display the specific display result at the end of the specific effect. Thereby, the unexpectedness and expectation which become a specific display result when the reach notice effect is executed can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

( 5 ) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4) , the effect executing means temporarily displays the identification information and then temporarily stops the display, and then displays the identification information again. Can be executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the production control CPU 120 can respond to the variation patterns PA1-4, PA2-2, PA3-2, PA3-3, PA3-5, PA3-7, etc.) The portion that executes the process of step S544 according to the effect control pattern determined in step S506), and the sudden big hit variable display pattern are re-variable using a predetermined timing during the re-variable display operation as the effect switching timing. Sudden big hit variable display pattern during display operation (for example, variation patterns PT1-4, PT2-3, PT2-5, PT2-7, PT3-1, PT -3 may be configured to include PT3-4 etc.).

  In such a configuration, it is possible to switch to the specific effect at a predetermined timing during the re-variable display operation, and to display and display the specific display result at the end of the specific effect. Thereby, the unexpectedness and expectation which become a specific display result when a re-variable display operation is performed can be improved, and the interest of a game can be improved.

( 6 ) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) , the performance executing means presents a predetermined achievement condition during variable display of the identification information, and when the achievement condition is satisfied, The mission effect controlled in the specific gaming state can be executed over a plurality of variable display of the identification information corresponding to the establishment of a plurality of start conditions (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S562 Until the processes of S556 and S564 are executed, a part where the process of step S544 is executed by the effect control pattern determined in step S506), the sudden big hit variable display pattern is notified that the mission effect is started. Missis with the predetermined timing during the mission start effect as the effect switching timing. At emission start effect sudden jackpot variable display pattern (e.g. variation pattern PT2-1, PT2-4, etc.) may be configured to include.

  In such a configuration, it is possible to switch to the specific effect at a predetermined timing during the mission start effect, and to derive and display the specific display result at the end of the specific effect. Thereby, the unexpectedness and expectation which become a specific display result when the mission start effect is executed can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

( 7 ) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6 ) above, variable winning means that is provided in the gaming area and changes between a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous to the player. (For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus 7) and execution of a round in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state until a first period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses as the first specific gaming state. A first specific game state control means (for example, the CPU 103 performs step control) that controls to a specific game state (for example, a two round big hit state when the big hit type is “surprise”) in which the number of times is the first number (eg “2”). In step S254, after setting the maximum value of the number of grand prize winning openings to “2”, the portion for executing the processing of steps S114 to S117) and the second specific gaming state in each round The period during which the variable winning means is changed to the first state is a second period (for example, 29 seconds) longer than the first period, or the second number of rounds is greater than the first number. (For example, “15” or the like), and after the end of the specific gaming state, the probability that it is determined to be controlled to the specific gaming state by the pre-determining means is higher than the normal state different from the specific gaming state. The second specific gaming state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is large in step S254) that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a 15 round big hit state when the big hit type is “probable change”) that becomes a probability state (for example, a probability variation state). A portion for executing the processing of steps S114 to S117 after setting the maximum number of winning mouth opening times to “15”), Further, it is determined whether to control the first specific game state or the second specific game state as the specific game state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S253), and the variable display pattern storage means The plurality of specific variable display patterns to be stored include a sudden jackpot variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4) for executing a sudden impact effect different from the rendering operation in the all effect jackpot variable display pattern, The variable display pattern has a variable display time shorter than the sudden hit large variable display pattern, and after starting the sudden effect similar to the sudden large hit variable display pattern, a predetermined timing during the sudden yield Switch to the specific effect as the effect switching timing and derive and display the specific display result Output sudden hit big variable display patterns (for example, variation patterns PT1-5, PT4-5, etc.), the all production big hit variable display pattern and the sudden production big hit variable display pattern by the pre-determining means When it is determined to control to the first specific gaming state, the variable display pattern selection means can be selected (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, variation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5-1 to PA5- 3, PA6-1 to PA6-5, PA7-1, PA7-2, PA8-1 to PA8-3, PA9-1 to PA9-5 depending on any of the variation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-4 A portion that can be determined, or a portion in which the variation patterns PT1-5 and PT4-5 can be determined according to the variation pattern type CA4-1 as shown in FIG. However, the variable display pattern can be selected by the variable display pattern selection means when it is determined by the prior determination means to be controlled to the second specific gaming state (for example, FIG. 20B). As shown in the figure, the variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4 may be determined according to any one of the variation pattern types CA5-1 and CA5-2.

  In such a configuration, it is possible to switch to the specific effect at a predetermined timing during the surprise effect, and to display the specific display result at the end of the specific effect. Thereby, the unexpectedness and expectation which become a specific display result when a surprise effect is performed can be improved, and the interest of a game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the mission start chance eyes, and the sudden chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern classification setting table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern setting table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern setting table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern setting table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a non-reach loss variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach loss variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation variation. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the notice pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notification effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a mission start effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of various effect control pattern tables. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a decoration symbol change completion. It is a figure which illustrates the time schedule of the display process by a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the time schedule of the display process by a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which illustrates the time schedule of the display process by a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a flowchart which shows the example of progress of production | presentation operation | movement until it complete | finishes after the variable display of a decoration symbol is started. It is a figure which shows the structural examples, such as various control boards in a modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display unit serving as a variable display unit divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Then, in the special symbol game, any one of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In response to this, variable display of decorative symbols (for example, vertical or horizontal scroll display) is performed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Be started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game (completely stopped display), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L in the image display device 5 are displayed. At 5C and 5R, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped (completely stopped). The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are movable within the display area of the image display device 5, and display the decorative symbols in a reduced or enlarged manner. You may be able to do that. When the special symbol or the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the display result in the variable display of each symbol is definitely displayed, and thereafter, the display state is such that the player can recognize that the current variable display does not proceed. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is displayed completely stopped, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”. Ornamental symbols may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Stopping and displaying the display symbol to the extent that the player can recognize that the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not progressing like the complete stop display or the temporary stop display is also referred to as a derivation display.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, effect images showing eight characters related to a predetermined motif, effect images combining numbers, characters or symbols and characters, and the like. The effect image indicating the character may include, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or an image indicating any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of types of decorative symbols that are variably displayed is not limited to eight, but may be any number of decorative symbols.

  While the decorative symbols are changing, in the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol numbers, for example, from top to bottom. Alternatively, a scrolling display that flows from the right side to the left side is performed. Then, when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, scroll display is performed from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number, and the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number is displayed. Subsequently, a decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display 5H is also arranged. In the start winning memory display section 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold storage number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display occurs when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. To do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning memory display section 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is changed to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not One of the displayed display parts is changed to a red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Here, when the hold memory display is performed, the special figure hold memory number based on the establishment of the variable display game start condition can be specified, but the start condition is the first start condition or the second start condition. If it cannot be specified, the display mode of the special figure reserved memory number may be changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, by changing the number of display parts corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number to gray display. .

  In the start winning memory display unit 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display unit 5H, or instead of the start winning memory display unit 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display section 5H, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories identifiable on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including.

  The display area of the image display device 5 may be provided with a color symbol display area for variably displaying a color symbol as identification information different from the decorative symbol. As an example, in the color symbol display area, when the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the variation of the color symbol (for example, the display color update display) is started. When the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started by the “left” color symbol display unit and the second special symbol display device 4B, the variation of the color symbol is started. The display part should just be included. Then, when the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special graphic game is completely stopped and displayed, the variation of the color symbol is finished, and the fixed color symbol that is the variable display result of the color symbol is completely stopped and displayed. The color symbols variably displayed on the “left” and “right” color symbol display sections include, for example, a plurality of types such as four types of symbols (“yellow”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, etc.) As long as the color pattern is included. Each of the color symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. As an example, the symbol numbers “1” to “4” only need to be assigned to the “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “blue” color symbols.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilted position by a predetermined solenoid for a normal electric accessory (normally A second start winning opening is provided. As an example, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the normally open state is such that the game ball is unlikely to enter the second starting winning opening by moving the movable wing piece in the vertical position when the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It becomes. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the normal electric accessory solenoid is turned on, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening. It becomes a state. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a predetermined large winning opening solenoid, and is opened (first state) and closed (second state) by the large winning opening door. Forms a big prize opening that changes. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening. The game ball that has entered the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately illuminating decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. For example, at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as a central position on the near side on the upper surface of the upper plate, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided. Note that the operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed, and may be a button that can be rotated, such as a rotary selector, or can be touched or pressed like a touch panel. It may be a thing, and the thing which can be tilted like a lever type switch may be sufficient. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 30 only needs to be able to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  In the normal game with the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined variable display time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is completely stopped and displayed. The variable symbol display time may be determined as one of a plurality of variable display times by, for example, extracting numerical data indicating a predetermined random value at the start of each normal game. . If a specific normal symbol (symbol per symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol that becomes a variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is It becomes "per ordinary figure". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”, the expansion / release control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted, for a predetermined time. When elapses, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. The process starts when the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. The first start condition is satisfied when the current special figure game using the first special figure can be started, for example, when the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state is ended. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. Is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is satisfied when the current special figure game using the second special figure can be started, for example, when the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after a predetermined variable display time elapses after the variable symbol special display is started, the result of the special symbol variable display is determined. The special symbol is displayed as a complete stop. The variable display time of the special symbol is, for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type as shown in FIG. 5 or numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern at the start of each special graphic game Corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the above, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variable display times. If a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the special display result is a “big hit”, and a special symbol other than the big bonus symbol (losing) If the symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes “losing” as a non-specific display result. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and the symbol indicating “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed that changes to a first state that is advantageous to the user. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in a round-two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the 15-round jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, the special symbol variation time (special diagram variation time) in the special figure game is controlled to be a short time state as compared with the normal state. Here, the normal state is a game state other than a special game state such as a big hit game state or a special game state such as a short-time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. In addition, after the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “3” out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it does not become the short-time state. You may make it be in a normal state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is This is usually referred to as a big hit symbol (also referred to as a “non-probable big hit symbol”). The variable display mode of special symbols and decorative symbols when the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a normal jackpot symbol is variable to “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. It is referred to as a display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”).

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol showing the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the state is over, or after the two round jackpot state is over based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, As one of the special game states different from the normal game state, for example, the special figure change time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability change state (high probability game state) in which probability change control (probability change control) is continuously performed is controlled. Is done. In this probability change state, the variable display result of each special figure game and the decorative symbol variable display is improved so that the probability that the variable display result becomes “big hit” and is further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state. Such a probability change state may be continued until the next variable display result is a “hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special game. On the other hand, after the certainty change state is reached, any one of the conditions that the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is first. You may make it complete | finish when it is materialized. In addition, even if the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times in the probability change state or before the variable display result is “big hit”, the probability change state ends at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started. There may be.

  Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15-round jackpot symbol controlled to the probable change state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a probabilistic big hit symbol. It is called. The variable display mode of special symbols and decorative symbols when the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a probable big hit symbol is variable "probable change" (also called "probable big hit") when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”). Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. The variable display mode of special symbols and decorative symbols when the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol is “surprise” (“surprise big hit” or “sudden probability big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”. ")" As a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type").

  In the probabilistic state and the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol variable display time in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the normal symbol variable display result of each time the normal symbol game is “normal”. Control for improving the probability of “per figure” than in the normal state, when the tilt time of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure” is in the normal state The player can be more likely to satisfy the second start condition by increasing the possibility that the game ball will enter the second start winning opening, such as a control for making it longer and a control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control which is advantageous to the user is performed. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. The control to be performed may be different between the probability variation state and the time-short state, or the combination of the controls to be performed (which may or may not include the same control) may be different.

  On the display screen of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is performed corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4 </ b> A and the second special symbol display device 4 </ b> B. That is, on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, the “left”, “middle”, or “right” decorative symbol display section 5 </ b> L based on the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. In all of 5C and 5R, decorative symbols are displayed in an accelerated manner (all symbols accelerated display). When a predetermined speed is reached, the decorative symbols are displayed at a constant speed (all symbols are displayed at a constant speed). Such all symbols acceleration display and all symbols constant speed display are included in all symbol variations that variably display the ornament symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. . After all the symbols change, for example, display the symbols in a decelerating display (each symbol deceleration display) in a predetermined order such as “Left” → “Right” → “Medium”. While stopping and displaying, for example, temporary stop display that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction is performed. When the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative design reaches the variable display time determined based on the variation pattern or the like, the fixed decorative design that is the variable display result is displayed completely stopped. Note that the procedure for stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative symbols is not limited to displaying the decorative symbols in a predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, a decorative symbol that is a confirmed decorative symbol at the same time may be displayed in a decelerating display (all symbol decelerating display).

  After all symbols change is started, the decorative symbols are reach-displayed on all or some of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. It may be derived and displayed in the state. Here, the reach display state refers to a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed when the decorative symbol derived and displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variation symbol”). ")" Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, etc.) The remaining decorative symbol display part (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been derived and displayed when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is derived and displayed. In the symbol display portion 5C, etc., the decorative symbols are changing, or the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R are all or part of the decorative symbols. This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination. Corresponding to the reach display state, an effect image such as an animation image or a live-action image different from the decorative design is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the display mode of the background image is changed, There are times when the variation pattern of the decorative design is changed. Such an effect image display, background image display mode change, and decorative pattern change mode change are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). Some reach productions are set such that when they appear, a big hit is likely to occur (a high probability is a big win) compared to a normal reach production (normal reach). Such a special reach production is also called a super reach production (or simply “super reach”). As an example, for reach production that becomes super reach, after performing a reach production similar to normal reach until a predetermined time elapses, for example, a decorative pattern such as a background image display mode, a displayed character, a decorative pattern variation direction, etc. The change of the production mode (so-called “development”) by changing at least one of the fluctuation modes before the reach display state or at the time of the normal reach, and the reach production peculiar to the super reach It is sufficient if the introduction part in is started. In addition, in the reach production that becomes super reach, when the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the introduction part in the reach production peculiar to super reach is started without performing the reach production similar to the normal reach. Things may be included.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the variable display state of decorative designs may become the reach display state, and the variable display result may be a “hit”, There may be a case where a specific effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of the decorative design. In this embodiment, an effect operation that is a specific effect of the “pseudo train” is set to be executable. Here, in the specific effect of “pseudo-ream”, all symbol variations start in response to the first start condition or the second start condition for starting variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols being established once. Then, the decorative symbols are displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R sequentially or simultaneously, and then “left”, “middle”, This is an effect operation in which a re-variable display operation (re-variation) for starting re-variable display of decorative symbols on all of the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R is executed a predetermined number of times. As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, the pseudo ream chance GC1 as shown in FIG. 3A is displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Any of a plurality of types of decorative symbol combinations predetermined as -GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, it is only necessary to set so that the rate at which the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of re-variations increases. As a result, the player can recognize that a specific effect of “pseudo ream” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo ream chances GC1 to GC8, and as the number of re-variations increases, The expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variation is performed once to three times, so that the decorative design can be changed based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it has been started 2-4 times in a row. In the following, the number of re-variations (for example, from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the stop display of the final stop symbol based on the first start condition or the second start condition being satisfied once (for example, “1” to “3”) is also referred to as the number of quasi-continuous re-variations, and the number of decorative symbol variations (for example, “2” to “4”) is also referred to as the number of pseudo-continuations. That is, the number of times of pseudo-continuations is a value obtained by adding “1” to the number of times of re-variation among pseudo-continuations.

  During the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the specific effect of “pseudo-continuation” is executed, an effect image showing a character prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5 with the progress of the pseudo continuous variation , Displaying a predetermined sound (special sound) from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9 with a predetermined lighting pattern, for effects provided inside or outside the game area A predetermined effect operation such as operating a plurality of movable members included in the accessory may be executed. As an example, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed again on all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, Pseudo-continuous variation is performed by performing any one or a plurality of operations among the display of the displayed effect image, the output of the special sound, the lighting of the lamp, and the operation of the movable member. May be notified in a recognizable manner.

  During the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike a reach effect or a specific effect, for example, a predetermined character image or message image is displayed after the variable symbol display state has reached the reach display state after all symbol variations have started. Depending on the display mode other than the variable display mode of the decorative design, such as displaying the display, there is a possibility that the variable display status of the decorative design becomes the reach display status, or the variable display result may be “big hit”. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that there is a certain event. Here, the notice effect for notifying the player that there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach display state is particularly referred to as “reach notice effect”. The effect operation as the notice effect may be executed (started) after all the symbol changes are started and before the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach display state. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “line notice”, “monitor notice”, and “step-up notice” are set to be executable. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect may be any effect that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the notice effect that becomes “Serial notice”, the decorative symbols are displayed on two or more decorative symbol display portions (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5R, etc.) after all the symbol variations start. Before the derivation display is performed, a predetermined effect operation serving as a button operation promotion effect is performed. The button operation promotion effect is an effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 by, for example, displaying an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5. If it is. The effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is not limited to an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display an effect image. The effect that causes a predetermined sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED for lighting or blinking in a predetermined lighting pattern, one for operating a movable member provided in a play accessory provided in or outside the game area in a predetermined operation mode, or any of these It may be a combination. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is set. When an operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, and a plurality of types of lines prepared in advance are stopped. Among them, an effect operation such as displaying a message image indicating one of the lines on the image display device 5 is executed. In addition, as a production | presentation operation | movement which alert | reports a line, various production | generation operations, such as outputting a predetermined audio | voice, for example from the speakers 8L and 8R, may be performed.

  In the notice effect that is “monitor notice”, for example, a predetermined display on the display screen of the image display device 5 is performed before the decorative symbols are derived and displayed on two or more decorative symbol display units after all the symbol variations are started. An effect image indicating a monitor is displayed at the position, and a predetermined effect operation serving as a button operation promotion effect is performed. Even when the button operation promotion effect is performed in the notice effect that becomes the “monitor notice”, the operation valid period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is also set. When an operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, and a plurality of types of characters prepared in advance are used. An effect operation such as displaying one of the effect images so as to appear in the monitor is performed. Various effect operations are performed such as displaying an effect image indicating a character and the like, displaying a message image notifying a message from the character, and outputting a predetermined sound notifying the message from the speakers 8L and 8R. It may be broken.

  In the notice effect that is “step-up notice”, for example, the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed before the decorative symbols are derived and displayed on the two or more decorative symbol display units after all the symbol variations are started. There may be an effect display in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order. In addition, after one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is initially displayed in a predetermined order) is displayed in the notice effect that is the “step-up notice”, The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without switching the effect image.

  If the special symbol that will be a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special symbol game that corresponds to the variable display result being “losing”, a decoration of “left”, “middle”, or “right” Among the symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, all of the symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R display patterns 5L, 5C, and 5R. In some cases, the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state in some of the decorative design display units, and then the reach effect is executed. When the reach effect is completed, a definite decorative design that is a reach-losing combination may be derived and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  If the special symbol that becomes the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol for the special symbol game that corresponds to the variable display result being “losing”, the “left”, “ Reach the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display portions (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5R, etc.) of the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R. After derivation and display in a non-reach display state different from the display state, a determined decorative design that becomes one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 as shown in FIG. There are cases in which a definite decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is derived and displayed. Such a decorative pattern variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “non-reach loss” or “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol whose final decorative symbol is one of the mission start chance MC1 to MC8, an effect operation prepared in advance as a mission start effect is executed. For example, any of the mission start chance items MC1 to MC8 may be derived and displayed when the mission start effect is started after the start of all symbol variations or after the mission start effect is executed. It should be noted that when the mission start effect is started, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed may be erased so that the confirmed decorative symbol is not derived and displayed after the mission start effect is executed. In this case, even after the decorative symbol being variably displayed is erased, for example, by continuously displaying the color symbol in the color symbol display area, it is possible to recognize that the variable symbol display is continuing. Good. In the mission start effect, an effect operation for presenting and notifying the player of the achievement condition of a certain mission (task) is performed. As an effect operation for presenting the achievement condition, for example, an effect image indicating the achievement condition is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a sound that allows the player to recognize the achievement condition is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A predetermined lamp or LED included in the game effect lamp 9 or the decoration LED is turned on to notify the achievement condition, or a movable member provided in the effect accessory provided in the game area or outside the game area is operated. As long as the achievement condition is notified, or the achievement condition is presented by combining any of these. The mission presented in this mission start effect is within a predetermined time (for example, any one of 1 minute, 3 minutes, and 5 minutes) and any of the predetermined decorative symbols (the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are “1” to “8”). Or the like in the reach display state. This mission may be determined as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance when the mission start effect is executed. After the mission start effect is performed, an effect mode different from the normal effect mode called the mission mode is started.

  In the mission mode, the effect during the mission is performed until the achievement condition is satisfied or until the mission mode is terminated without the achievement condition being satisfied. For example, if the variable display result does not become “big hit” even if the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied a plurality of times before the achievement condition is satisfied, a plurality of times corresponding to each start condition satisfied during the mission mode Production during the mission is performed over the variable display. In the effect during the mission, the effect image that presents the achievement condition in an identifiable manner is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the display mode of the background image on the display screen of the image display device 5 is the display mode in the normal effect mode. The sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the decorative design is variably displayed is different from the sound in the normal effect mode, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on. By making the pattern different from the lighting pattern in the normal effect mode, or by combining any of these, the effect operation may be performed in an effect mode different from the normal effect mode. When the variable display result is “big hit” during the mission mode, it is only necessary to be able to execute an effect that satisfies the achievement condition. Depending on the presented mission, even when the variable display result is “big hit” during the mission mode, the effect of satisfying the achievement condition may not be executed. In this way, the achievement condition presented as a mission is that the variable display result can be “big hit” when it is satisfied, while the variable display result can be “big hit” even when it is not satisfied. I just need it. When the achievement condition is not satisfied, the variable display result does not become “big hit”, and the mission mode is finished, the normal effect mode may be returned.

  When a special symbol that is a 15-round jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, as in the variable display mode of “Leach Loss”, all symbols change after starting “Left”, “ The reach effect may be executed after the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state in some of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “middle” and “right”. When the reach effect ends, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed. As an example, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, the predetermined special symbol is a special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a normal big hit symbol. A definite decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed. As another example, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”, the confirmed special symbol is a special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probable big hit symbol. A fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be derived and displayed, or a fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be derived and displayed. When the confirmed special symbol becomes a probable big hit symbol, after the fixed ornament symbol that is normally a big hit combination is derived and displayed, the big hit game state is started, the round in the big hit gaming state is being executed, or the big hit gaming state At the time of termination or the like, an effect operation for notifying that the state is controlled to the certain change state may be performed. Thus, when the reach effect is completed, the effect mode in the case where the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed is also referred to as all effect or complete effect.

  For example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display sections 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are the determined decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations. Among the decorative patterns of “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose design numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. Any decoration display unit 5L, 5C, 5R may be used as long as it is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

  For example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are the fixed decorative symbols that are the probable big hit combinations. Among the decorative patterns of “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose pattern numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. Any decoration display unit 5L, 5C, 5R may be used as long as it is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols.

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a probable variation jackpot combination, an effect operation that is a mission start effect may be executed. In this case, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, the mission achievement condition is presented by the effect operation that becomes the mission start effect. After that, for example, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach display state, it becomes possible to recognize that the achievement condition has been established by entering the reach display state with the decorative symbol that matches the achievement condition presented as the mission. After reaching the notification, the reach effect is executed, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination may be derived and displayed. As an example, after all symbols change is started, when the mission start effect is started, a decorative symbol that becomes one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 is derived and displayed, and then all symbols are changed again. Then, after the decorative design that matches the achievement condition is derived and displayed in the reach display state, after the reach effect is executed, the definite decorative combination of the jackpot combination may be derived and displayed. As another example, after starting all symbol variations, a mission start effect is performed and an achievement condition is presented without deriving and displaying a decorative symbol that is one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8. Then, after the decorative design that matches the achievement condition is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the definite decorative design of the jackpot combination may be derived and displayed after the reach effect is executed. Note that any one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 is presented as a mission achievement condition, and one of the presented mission start chances MC1 to MC8 is derived and displayed, so that the variable display result becomes “big hit”. You may do it. In this case, after the mission start effect is executed following the start of all symbol variations, one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 that matches the achievement condition is derived and displayed, and it is variable without executing the reach effect. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the display result became "big hit".

  Corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the fixed special symbol becomes the 15 round big hit symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination and the probable big hit combination is derived. After the display, etc., it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and after the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the time reduction state or the probability variation state. In this way, when the time reduction state or the probable change state occurs after the end of the 15 round big hit state, the effect mode may be different from the normal effect mode. For example, in the short-time state after the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect image notifying that the time-short state is “chance time” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, or the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. For example, the display mode of the background image may be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, so that the player can recognize the short-time state in the short-time effect mode. Further, in the probability variation state after the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect image notifying that the probability variation state is “being probability variation” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, or the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. For example, the display mode of the background image may be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, so that the effect mode during probability change in which the player can recognize the probability change state may be set.

  If a special symbol that is a two-round jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol for a special symbol game that corresponds to a variable jacking result of “big hit” and a big hit type of “surprise”, After the start, a surprise mode start effect is executed as a surprise effect different from the full effect or the complete effect. Then, when starting the accuracy mode start effect or after executing the accuracy mode start effect, for example, a definite decorative symbol that becomes one of the accuracy chance items TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. 3C is derived and displayed. That's fine. It should be noted that, when the accusation mode start effect is started, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed may be erased, and after the accuracy mode start effect is executed, the definite ornament symbol may not be derived and displayed. In this case, even after the decorative symbol being variably displayed is erased, for example, by continuously displaying the color symbol in the color symbol display area, it is possible to recognize that the variable symbol display is continuing. Good. In the surprise mode start effect, a predetermined effect operation is performed in response to the big hit type being “Accuracy”. In addition, as a surprise mode start effect, various effect operations may be executed in the same effect manner as the mission start effect. After the surprise mode start effect is performed, an effect mode different from the normal effect mode referred to as the accuracy mode is started. In addition, the random mode start effect is not limited to the effect operation that is executed during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, and continues from the variable display even during part or all of the period of the two round big hit state. An effect operation may be performed.

  In this way, after the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type becomes “accurate”, the confirmed special symbol becomes a two round big hit symbol, and then the two round big hit state is controlled. After the completion, the control mode is changed to a probable change state, and the effect mode becomes the suddenness mode. For example, in the surprise mode, an effect operation in which the player can recognize that the state is in the probability change state may be performed in the same effect mode as the effect mode during probability change or a different effect mode. In addition, when various types of performance operations are performed in the same manner as the mission start performance as the accuracy mode start effects, various performance operations may be performed in the same mode as the mission mode in the accuracy mode. . In this case, the achievement condition is not satisfied, the variable display result does not become “big hit”, and when the abruptness mode ends, it may be shifted to the effect mode during the probability change, You may make it return to presentation mode.

  In this embodiment, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, all the effects are displayed at the predetermined effect switching timing during the variable display of the decorative symbols. There is a case where the production operation similar to the production is switched to the sudden production as a specific production different from the full production or the complete production. When the sudden effect is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed. As an effect switching timing for switching to a sudden effect, for example, when a predetermined time (4000 milliseconds [ms], etc.) has elapsed since the start of all symbol changes (when all symbols are changing or when the left symbol is stopped), button operation is promoted When the operation button 30 is operated within the operation effective period when the effect is performed (when the button is operated), when the specific effect of “pseudo ream” is executed, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily Decorative symbols are variable, such as when stopped (when chances are stopped), or when re-change is performed 1 to 3 times (when changing after re-change) when a specific effect of “pseudo-run” is executed A plurality of timings before the display state becomes the reach display state may be determined in advance. In addition, as an effect switching timing for switching to a sudden effect, for example, when a reach effect that becomes normal reach is being executed (during fluctuation after the reach is established), when a transition is made from a reach effect that becomes normal reach to a reach effect that becomes super reach A plurality of timings after the variable display state of the decorative design becomes the reach display state, such as when the introduction part of the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed (at the time of super introduction effect) It only has to be defined. Here, at the time of super introduction production, after performing the reach production similar to normal reach, after the super development time when the production mode changes, the introduction part in the reach production peculiar to super reach is executed, or It suffices if the introduction part in the reach production specific to the super reach is executed without performing the reach production similar to the normal reach. In addition, as the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect, for example, when the mission start effect is being executed (during the mission start effect), when the mission start effect is ended (when the mission start effect is finished), the suddenness mode start effect A plurality of timings such as when a decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R during the execution of (when the right symbol is stopped) may be determined in advance.

  Note that all of these timings do not have to be predetermined as the effect switching timing, and any timing may be determined as the effect switching timing in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, timing other than these timings may be used as the effect switching timing to switch from the effect operation similar to the all effect or the complete effect to the sudden effect. For example, after a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the timing at which a non-reach combination decorative pattern is derived and displayed, or after the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach display state The production operation may be switched to the sudden production, for example, at the timing when the decorative design of the reach-losing combination is derived and displayed.

  When such a sudden effect is executed, the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened compared to the case where the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed after the reach effect is completed. For example, the execution time of the sudden effect is determined in advance so as to be a time (4000 milliseconds [ms] or the like) shorter than the execution time of the reach effect that is executed in the full effect or the complete effect.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the re-drawing effect, the decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the image display device 5. Later, for example, the decorative pattern display units 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” are changed again in a state where the same decorative pattern is aligned, and the decorative pattern that is a probable big hit combination, Any of the decorative symbols that become a big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed corresponding to the fact that the big hit type is “normal”, as the re-lottery effect, after the decorative pattern displayed temporarily stopped is re-varied, The change promotion promotion effect is performed to derive and display the determined decorative design. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed in response to the jackpot type being “probable change”, the re-lottery effect is re-variable after the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is re-variable. A changing promotion success effect that stops and displays a fixed decorative symbol that is a combination may be executed, or a changing promotion failure effect may be executed.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the variable display result is displayed in the period from when the variable display result is stopped until the end of the 15 round big hit state. A jackpot promotion effect may be executed as a notification effect on whether or not to control. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. A period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game may be used. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or decorative design after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular. In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”, if the definite decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, the promotion effect during the big hit is given. It should just be prevented from being executed.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette enters the “even number” in the big hit promotion promotion effect and displays the effect image of “Sorry!”, While the successful promotion to the big hit hits the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. When the big hit type is “probable change”, but the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed, the promotion will be in the probable change state by executing the promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit game state is finished. What is necessary is just to alert | report that there exists. When the jackpot type is “normal”, it is only necessary not to execute the success promotion effect during the jackpot and not to notify that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state until the jackpot gaming state ends. .

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 is equipped with, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. Further, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the like.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulating circuit has a diode whose anode is connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the stage control board connector corresponding to the stage control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is constituted by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating the start of change of the first special figure in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating the start of change of the second special figure in the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B.

  The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special graphic game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the result of prior determination as to whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. In this case, different EXT data is set in accordance with the big hit type determination result indicating whether the big hit type is “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise”. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result indicating that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” and the big hit type determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates the start of a big hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  Command A1XXH, corresponding to 15 open games in the 15 round big hit state, specifies the display of the effect image during the period when the big winning port is open in each round. This is a medium specification command. Command A2XXH is an effect image (for example, an effect image in the interval between rounds) corresponding to 15 open games in the 15 round round big hit state during the period when the big prize opening changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round. This is a designation command after opening the big prize opening for a 15-time open game that designates display. In the special opening command during the opening of the big prize opening for 15 games and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, a different EXT corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state. Data is set. In the 15 round big hit state, regardless of whether it is a period in which the grand prize opening is open in each round or a period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state by the end of each round. A continuous production operation may be executed.

  Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the end of the big hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. .

  Command A4XXH specifies the display of the effect image during the period when the big winning opening is open in each round corresponding to the two opening game in the two round big hit state. This is a medium specification command. Command A5XXH is for a two-open game that specifies the display of an effect image during a period when the big prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the two-open game in the two round big hit state This is a command specified after the grand prize opening. With the command for opening a special prize opening for a game that is opened twice or for a command after opening a special prize opening, for example, a different EXT corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” or “2”) in a big round hit state. Data is set. In the 2 round big hit state, regardless of whether it is a period in which the grand prize opening is open in each round or the period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round. A continuous production operation may be executed.

  The command B001H is for executing a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H is for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition is established.

  The command C0XXH is a total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified on the start winning memory display unit 5H provided in the image display device 5 or the like. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in the start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A random access memory (RAM) 102 that provides an area, a central processing unit (CPU) 103 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  On the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining the reach, a variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for determining the type and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated by the random number circuit 104 independently of the CPU 103, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is randomized by the CPU 103. It may be updated by software using The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit game state with “big hit”. For example, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result takes a value in the range of “1” to “65536”. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is a random value used to determine the big hit type as one of a plurality of types such as “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprising accuracy” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a numerical value. For example, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random value MR3 is a random value used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach display state when the variable display result is “lost”. For example, the random number value MR3 for reach determination takes a value in the range of “1” to “239”.

  The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used for determining the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type takes a value in the range of “1” to “241”. The random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used for determining the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “251”.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data respectively constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and setting tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and variable display patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the variable display pattern table is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result decision table, a first special figure display result decision table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and a second special figure display result decision table 130B shown in FIG. Are prepared in advance. The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a variable display result before a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 21 is off or on. Thus, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned so as to be associated with the jackpot determination value data or the loss determination value data. In the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special symbol display result determination table 130B, the table data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is allocated to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. It is data for decision. In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the probability variation flag is on, more random number values MR1 than when the probability variation flag is off, Allocated to jackpot decision data. As a result, in the probability variation state in which the probability variation flag is turned on, the probability that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is higher than in the normal state or the short time state in which the probability variation flag is turned off. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state compared to the normal state and the short time state when in the probability variation state The determination data is allocated to the determination result as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. When the jackpot type determination table 131 determines that the variable display result is “big hit” and is controlled to the big hit gaming state, based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the big hit type is “normal”, “probability change”, “ It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types such as “accuracy”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (variation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 21 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit types of “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprise”. Here, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “1” when the special figure game using the first special figure is started on the first special symbol display device 4A when the first start condition is satisfied. Thus, “2” is set when the second special symbol display device 4B starts the special figure game using the second special figure when the second start condition is satisfied. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or to control to the 2 round jackpot game state, or to control to the 15 round jackpot state This is data for determination that is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the random value MR2 assigned to the “normal” or “probable” jackpot type indicates the determination result that control is made to the 15-round jackpot state, while being assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. The table data indicating the random number value MR2 indicates the determination result that the round-robin state is controlled to 2 rounds. Further, the table data indicating the random number MR2 assigned to the “normal” jackpot type indicates the determination result that the control is not performed in the probability variation state, while being assigned to the jackpot type “probability variation” or “surprise”. The table data indicating the random value MR2 indicates the determination result that the control is performed to the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 corresponds to the jackpot type determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, using the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (the jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) for setting to any one of “0” to “2” is included.

  In the setting of the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7, the random value for determining the big hit type for the big hit type of “surprise” depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. The assignment of MR2 is different. That is, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the value in the range of “83” to “100” among the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is allocated to the “big hit” big hit type, while the fluctuation If the special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied.

  8A to 8C show configuration examples of reach determination tables stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table 132A illustrated in FIG. 8A, a reach determination table 132B illustrated in FIG. 8B, and a reach determination table 132C illustrated in FIG. Are prepared in advance. Each of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C determines whether or not to change the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach display state when it is determined that the variable display result is “losing” and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR3. Each reach determination table 132A to 132C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. In each of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C, the reach determination random value MR3 is determined as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach. HC1-2 is associated with either a determination result indicating that the reach display state is not set or a determination result indicating the reach display state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. So that it is allocated.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 8A, “1” to “204” among the random numbers MR3 for reach determination corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. Are assigned to the determination results of the non-reach HA 1-1, while values in the range of “205” to “239” are assigned to the determination results of the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total number of pending storages is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random number values MR3 for reach determination. Range values are assigned to the non-reach HA1-2 decision results. Further, in response to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “2”, “1”, which is larger than the number of random values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 among the random numbers MR3 for reach determination. A value in the range of “220” is allocated to the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3. The non-reach HA1-1 of the reach determination random number MR3 corresponding to each of the case where the total reserved storage number is “3” or “4” or any of “5” to “8”. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random values assigned to each of the determination results of non-reach HA1-3, is allocated to the determination results of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. It is. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1” to “3”) or more, reachable display of the variable display state of the decorative symbols is performed compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate at which the decision to enter the state is made is low. The average variable display time of special symbols and decorative patterns in the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average variable display time in the variation pattern corresponding to “reach”. Thus, the average variable display time can be shortened when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In addition, the reach determination table 132B selected as the use table when in the probability variation state or the reach determination table 132C selected as the use table in the time reduction state is selected as the use table when in the normal state. Compared to the reach determination table 132A, a larger number of random values MR3 are allocated to the determination result indicating that the reach display state is not set. With such a setting, the probability that the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach display state is lower in the probability changing state or the short time state than in the normal state. Thus, the average variable display time when the variable display result is “lost” can be shortened in the probability changing state or in the short time state, compared with the normal state.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the variation pattern type setting table 140 stored in the ROM 101. The variation pattern type setting table 140 is composed of setting data for determining the contents of a plurality of types of variation pattern types according to variable display results and variable display modes (a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). In this embodiment, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-4, the variation pattern types CA1-4, and the variation pattern types correspond to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. CB1-1 to variation pattern type CB1-3 and variation pattern type CC1-1 to variation pattern type CC1-3 are prepared in advance. In addition, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 are prepared in advance as the variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Further, as the variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable variation”, the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-4, variation pattern type CA4−4. 1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 are prepared in advance. In addition, a variation pattern type CA5-1 and a variation pattern type CA5-2 are prepared in advance as variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Each variation pattern type only needs to be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns along the content defined by the variation pattern type setting table 140. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the variation pattern type CA1-1, the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is not shortened in the normal state, and the specific effect such as “pseudo-continuous” and the mission start effect are not executed. It is a variation pattern type of “no shortening (normal state)”, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening (normal state)”. In the variation pattern type CA1-2, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “3” or “4” in the normal state, A variation pattern type of “hold 3 or 4 shortened (normal state)” in which a specific effect or a mission start effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “hold 3 or 4 shortened (normal state)” It consists of The variable pattern type CA1-3 has a variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is any of “5” to “8” in the normal state, ”Is a variation pattern type of“ Reserved 5-8 shortened (normal state) ”and a variation associated with“ Reserved 5-8 shortened (normal state) ”in advance. It is configured to include a pattern. The variation pattern type CA1-4 is a variation pattern type of “pseudo-run, mission start effect” in which a specific effect of “pseudo-run” and a mission start effect are executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach” in the normal state. It is configured to include a variation pattern associated with “pseudo-run, mission start effect” in advance.

  The variation pattern type CB1-1 is a variation of “no shortening (probability variation state)” in which a specific effect such as “pseudo-run” or a mission start effect is not executed because the variable display time of a special symbol or a decoration symbol is shortened in the probability variation state. It is a pattern type, and includes a variation pattern associated in advance with “no shortening (probability variation state)”. In the variation pattern type CB1-2, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “2” to “8” in the probability variation state. It is a variation pattern type of “2-8 shortening (probability variation state)” in which a specific effect or a mission start effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “2-8 shortening (probability variation state)” It consists of The variation pattern type CB1-3 is a variation pattern type of “including pseudo-continuous (probability variation state)” that may execute a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” during variable display of decorative symbols in the probability variation state. It includes a variation pattern previously associated with “include (probability variation state)”.

  In the variation pattern type CC1-1, the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened in the time-short state, and the “no shortening (time-short state)” variation in which the specific effect such as “pseudo ream” and the mission start effect are not executed. It is a pattern type, and includes a variation pattern that is previously associated with “no shortening (time-short state)”. In the variable pattern type CC1-2, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened corresponding to the case where the total number of stored memories is “2” to “8” in the short-time state, It is a variation pattern type of “2-8 shortened (temporary state)” in which a specific effect or a mission start effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “2-8 shortened (temporal state)” It consists of The variation pattern type CC1-3 is a variation pattern type of “including pseudo-continuous (short-time state)” that may execute a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” during variable display of decorative symbols in the short-time state. It includes a variation pattern that is preliminarily associated with “include (time-short state)”.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is a variation pattern type of “normal reach” in which normal reach production (normal reach) is performed after the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach display state, and is associated with “normal reach” in advance. Consists of fluctuation patterns. The variation pattern type CA2-2 is a variation pattern type of “super reach α” that executes a reach effect predetermined as super reach α in the super reach after changing the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbols to the reach display state. , And includes a variation pattern associated with “super reach α” in advance. The change pattern type CA2-3 executes a reach effect predetermined as a super reach β having a different appearance mode from the super reach α in the super reach after the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach display state. The variation pattern type of “reach β” includes a variation pattern associated with “super reach β” in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA3-1 executes a normal reach effect (normal reach) after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach display state, and derives and displays a definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination when the reach effect ends. It is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (no sudden production / no re-lottery)”, and includes a variation pattern associated in advance with “normal reach (no sudden production / no re-lottery)”. The variation pattern type CA3-2 executes a reach effect of either super reach α or super reach β after the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach display state, and when the reach effect ends, It is a variation pattern type of “Super Reach (no sudden effect / no re-lottery)” for deriving and displaying a confirmed decorative pattern, and includes a variation pattern pre-associated with “Super Reach (no sudden effect / no re-lottery)”. Consists of. The variation pattern type CA3-3 executes a normal reach effect after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach display state, and temporarily stops displaying the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination when the reach effect ends. The variation pattern type of “normal reach (no sudden production / with re-lottery)” for executing the re-lottery production, including the variation pattern previously associated with “normal reach (without sudden production / with re-lottery)” Is done. The variation pattern type CA3-4 executes a reach effect of one of the super reach α and the super reach β after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach display state, and the normal jackpot combination when the reach effect ends. This is a variation pattern type of “Super Reach (no sudden production / with re-draw)”, which executes a re-lottery effect after temporarily displaying the decorative symbols of “Super Reach (without sudden production / with re-drawing)” And a variation pattern that is associated in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 is a case where a sudden effect is executed during variable display of a decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived or temporarily stopped when the sudden effect is finished. Is a variation pattern type of “sudden short” that has a relatively short period from the start to the effect switching timing to switch to a sudden effect, and includes a variation pattern that is pre-associated with “sudden short” . As an example, in the variation pattern type CA4-1, the period from the start of all symbol variations based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition to the effect switching timing is less than 16000 milliseconds [ms]. A variation pattern is included.

  The variation pattern type CA4-2 is a case where the sudden effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative design, and the decorative design of the big hit combination is derived or displayed temporarily when the sudden effect is finished. It is a variation pattern type of “sudden middle” in which the period from the start to the effect switching timing to switch to the sudden effect is medium, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “sudden middle” Yes. As an example, in the variation pattern type CA4-2, the period from the start of all symbol variations based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition to the effect switching timing is 16000 milliseconds [ms] or more. A variation pattern that is less than 36000 milliseconds [ms] is included.

  The variation pattern type CA4-3 is a case where the sudden effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative design, and the decorative design of the jackpot combination is derived or displayed temporarily when the sudden effect is finished. Is a variation pattern type of “sudden long” that has a relatively long period from the start of the event to the effect switching timing for switching to a sudden effect, and includes a variation pattern that is associated with “sudden long” in advance. Yes. As an example, in the variation pattern type CA4-3, the period from the start of all symbol variations based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition to the effect switching timing is 36000 milliseconds [ms] or more. A variation pattern is included.

  The variation pattern type CA5-1 is a variation pattern type of “accuracy mode start effect” in which the accuracy mode start effect is executed without changing the decorative display variable display state to the reach display state. It includes a variation pattern associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA5-2 executes the reach effect of the super reach α after changing the decorative symbol variable display state to the reach display state, and shifts from the reach effect to the sudden mode start effect. Variation pattern type of “via reach α”, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “probability mode start effect (via super reach α)”.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the variation pattern setting table 141A stored in the ROM 101. The variation pattern setting table 141A is composed of setting data for determining variable display times and contents in a plurality of types of variation patterns that can be selected when the variable display result is “losing”. The specific contents of the effect in the variation pattern are determined and set on the side of the effect control board 12 in accordance with the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11. In this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variation pattern PA1-1 to variation pattern PA1-5, variation pattern PB1-1, A fluctuation pattern PB1-2, a fluctuation pattern PC1-1, and a fluctuation pattern PC1-2 are prepared in advance. Further, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”, the variation pattern PA2-1, the variation pattern PA2-2, the variation pattern PA3-1 to the variation pattern PA3-7. Are prepared in advance. The variable display results are “lost” and variable display modes are displayed, such as the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 to fluctuation pattern PA1-5, fluctuation pattern PB1-1, fluctuation pattern PB1-2, fluctuation pattern PC1-1, fluctuation pattern PC1-2. The variation pattern prepared corresponding to the case where “is non-reach” is also referred to as a non-reach loss variation pattern (or “normal loss variation pattern”). Prepared for cases where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”, such as the fluctuation pattern PA2-1, fluctuation pattern PA2-2, fluctuation pattern PA3-1 to fluctuation pattern PA3-7. The obtained variation pattern is also referred to as a reach loss variation pattern. A variation pattern prepared for a case where the variable display result is “lost”, such as a non-reach loss variation pattern or a reach loss variation pattern, is also referred to as a loss variation pattern.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the variation pattern setting table 141B stored in the ROM 101. The variation pattern setting table 141B is a variable display in a plurality of types of variation patterns that can be selected when the sudden display is not executed among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable variation”. It consists of setting data that defines time and content. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the change pattern corresponding to the case where the sudden effect is not executed is the change pattern PA4-1. Pattern PA4-2, fluctuation pattern PA5-1 to fluctuation pattern PA5-3, fluctuation pattern PA6-1 to fluctuation pattern PA6-5, fluctuation pattern PA7-1, fluctuation pattern PA7-2, fluctuation pattern PA8-1 to fluctuation pattern PA8 −3, variation pattern PA9-1 to variation pattern PA9-5 are prepared in advance. Among these, the redrawing effect is not executed in the variation pattern PA4-1, the variation pattern PA4-2, the variation pattern PA5-1 to the variation pattern PA5-3, and the variation pattern PA6-1 to the variation pattern PA6-5. On the other hand, the redrawing effect is executed in the variation pattern PA7-1, the variation pattern PA7-2, the variation pattern PA8-1 to the variation pattern PA8-3, and the variation pattern PA9-1 to the variation pattern PA9-5. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the re-lottery effect execution time is set to 10000 milliseconds [ms]. Variation pattern PA4-1, Variation pattern PA4-2, Variation pattern PA5-1 to Variation pattern PA5-3, Variation pattern PA6-1 to Variation pattern PA6-5, Variation pattern PA7-1, Variation pattern PA7-2, Variation pattern Among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” like PA8-1 to fluctuation pattern PA8-3 and fluctuation pattern PA9-1 to fluctuation pattern PA9-5 The variation pattern prepared corresponding to the case where the effect is not executed is also referred to as an all effect jackpot variation pattern.

  FIG. 12A shows a configuration example of the variation pattern setting table 141C stored in the ROM 101. The variation pattern setting table 141C is variable in a plurality of types of variation patterns that can be selected when a sudden effect is executed, among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable variation”. It consists of setting data that determines the display time and contents. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the fluctuation patterns PT1-1 to PT1-1 are used as the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the sudden effect is executed. Variation pattern PT1-5, Variation pattern PT2-1 to Variation pattern PT2-7, Variation pattern PT3-1 to Variation pattern PT3-6, Variation pattern PT4-1 to Variation pattern PT4-5, Variation pattern PT5-1 to Variation pattern PT5-7 and variation pattern PT6-1 to variation pattern PT6-6 are prepared in advance. Among these, the redrawing effect is not executed in the variation pattern PT1-1 to variation pattern PT1-5, variation pattern PT2-1 to variation pattern PT2-7, variation pattern PT3-1 to variation pattern PT3-6. On the other hand, in the variation pattern PT4-1 to variation pattern PT4-5, variation pattern PT5-1 to variation pattern PT5-7, variation pattern PT6-1 to variation pattern PT6-6, a re-lottery effect is executed. Variation pattern PT1-1 to variation pattern PT1-5, variation pattern PT2-1 to variation pattern PT2-7, variation pattern PT3-1 to variation pattern PT3-6, variation pattern PT4-1 to variation pattern PT4-5, variation pattern Among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” like PT5-1 to fluctuation pattern PT5-7 and fluctuation pattern PT6-1 to fluctuation pattern PT6-6 The fluctuation pattern prepared corresponding to the case where the effect is executed is also referred to as a sudden big hit fluctuation pattern. Note that the change pattern PT2-7 and the change pattern PT3-1 shown in FIG. 12A have different effect switching timings for switching to the sudden effect, and accordingly, the variable display time is also set to be different. . Also, the change pattern PT5-7 and the change pattern PT6-1 shown in FIG. 12A have different effect switching timings for switching to the sudden effect, and accordingly, the variable display time is set to be different. .

  FIG. 12B shows a configuration example of the variation pattern setting table 141D stored in the ROM 101. The variation pattern setting table 141D is composed of setting data for determining variable display times and contents for a plurality of types of variation patterns that can be selected when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Yes. In this embodiment, variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4 are prepared in advance as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In the variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4 shown in FIG. 12 (B), after the suddenness mode start effect is finished, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes one of the suddenness chance items TC1 to TC4 is derived and displayed and stops. On the other hand, in the variation pattern PF1-1 to variation pattern PF1-4, the suddenness mode start effect may be performed after any of the sudden chance items TC1 to TC4 is temporarily stopped and displayed. The display of the decorative design may be erased when the start effect is started, and the fixed decorative design may not be derived and displayed. Like the variation pattern PF1-1 to variation pattern PF1-4, the variation pattern prepared corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” is also referred to as a sudden hit big variation pattern. In addition, a variation pattern prepared corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, such as the all-effects big hit variation pattern, the sudden big hit variation pattern, and the sudden hit big variation pattern, is also referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  FIGS. 13A to 13C show configuration examples of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table, a non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 13A, a non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. A non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 13C is prepared in advance. Each of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C has a variable display result of “loss” and a variable display mode of “non-reach”. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on MR4. Each of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is in accordance with the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 13D, for example, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. Accordingly, it is selected as a use table.

  In the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133A, for determining the variation pattern type according to which of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5 the determination result that the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Are assigned so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-4. In the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133B, for determining the variation pattern type according to whether the determination result that the variable display mode is “non-reach” is non-reach HB1-1 or non-reach HB1-2. Are allocated so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CB1-1 to CB1-3. In the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133C, for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result that the variable display mode is “non-reach” is non-reach HC1-1 or non-reach HC1-2. Are allocated so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CC1-1 to CC1-3.

  FIGS. 14A to 14C show a configuration example of the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table 134A shown in FIG. 14A, the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table 134B shown in FIG. 14B, and the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table 134C shown in FIG. ) Reach loss variation pattern type determination table 134C is prepared in advance. The reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C respectively change the variation pattern type to the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “loss” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It is a table that is referred to for making a decision based on it. Each reach loss variation pattern type determination table 134A to 134C depends on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. And selected as a use table.

  In the reach loss variation pattern type determination table 134A, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is determined depending on which of the reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3 is the determination result indicating that the variable display mode is “reach”. Are allocated so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3. In the reach loss variation pattern type determination table 134B, in response to the determination result indicating that the variable display mode is “reach” is reach HB2-1, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type CA2−. 1 to 5 so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA2-3. In the reach loss variation pattern type determination table 134C, in response to the determination result indicating that the variable display mode is “reach” is reach HC2-1, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type CA2−. 1 to 5 so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA2-3.

  FIGS. 15A to 15C, FIGS. 16A and 16B, and FIGS. 17A to 17F show configuration examples of the big hit variation pattern type determination table. In this embodiment, as the jackpot variation pattern type determination table, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 15 (A), the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. 15 (B), and FIG. ) Shown in FIG. 16A, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135E shown in FIG. 16B, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135E shown in FIG. Jackpot variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. 17, jackpot variation pattern type determination table 136B shown in FIG. 17B, jackpot variation pattern type determination table 136C shown in FIG. 17C, and jackpot variation pattern shown in FIG. Fluctuation pattern type determination table 137A and jackpot fluctuation shown in FIG. And the turn type determination table 137B, and the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 137C shown in FIG. 17 (F), prepared in advance. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E, 136A to 136C, and 137A to 137C each determine the variation pattern type for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “big hit”. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR4. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E, 136A to 136C, and 137A to 137C, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 17G, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, and the time reduction It is selected as a usage table according to which state it is in, the variable special figure designation buffer value, and the jackpot type buffer value.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A, 135B, 135D, and 135E, the total number of reserved storages is within any range of “0” to “2”, “3” to “5”, and “6” to “8”. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is associated with one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-4 and variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3. Is allocated as In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135C, 136C, and 137C, the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is allocated so as to be associated with either the variation pattern type CA5-1 or the variation pattern type CA5-2. . In the variation pattern type determination table 136A, the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned so as to be associated with one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-4. In the variation pattern type determination tables 136B, 137A, and 137B, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-4, variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern CA4-3. It is allocated so as to be associated with either one.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A, 135B, 135D, and 135E, the total number of reserved storages is within any range of “0” to “2”, “3” to “5”, and “6” to “8”. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is different so that the ratio determined to the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 including the variation pattern for executing the sudden effect varies depending on whether It is assigned to each variation pattern type. As an example, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A, if the total number of reserved storage is within the range of “0” to “2”, “221” to “241” among the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type. Are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 to the variation pattern type CA4-3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 135A, if the total number of reserved storage is within the range of “3” to “5”, “211” to “2” among the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type. The value in the range of “241” is allocated to the variation pattern type CA4-1 to the variation pattern type CA4-3. Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 135A, if the total number of reserved storage is within the range of “6” to “8”, “201” to “241” of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type. Range values are assigned to the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3. With such a setting, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern in which the sudden effect is executed can be varied according to the total number of reserved memories. For example, according to the setting in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 135A, the total number of reserved memories is “3” to “5” as compared with the case where the total number of reserved memories is in the range of “0” to “2”. The sudden big hit fluctuation pattern can be selected at a higher rate when it is within the range or when the total number of reserved storage is within the range of “6” to “8”. It should be noted that the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern is not limited to one that varies depending on the total number of reserved memories, and the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern varies depending on the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number. In addition, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type may be assigned to each variation pattern type.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A, 135B, 135D, and 135E, the total number of reserved storages is within any range of “0” to “2”, “3” to “5”, and “6” to “8”. Depending on whether the determination ratio of the variation pattern type CA4-1, the determination ratio of the variation pattern type CA4-2, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern type CA4-3 are different. A random value MR4 is assigned to each variation pattern type. As an example, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A, if the total number of reserved storage is within the range of “0” to “2”, only the value “221” is included in the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type. While assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1, a value in the range of “222” to “226”, which is larger than the number of random values assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1, is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-2. Further, a value in the range of “227” to “241”, which is larger than the number of random values assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, is allocated to the variation pattern type CA4-3. On the other hand, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A, if the total number of reserved storage is within the range of “6” to “8”, “201” to “201” among the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type. The value in the range of “230” is allocated to the variation pattern type CA4-1, while the value in the range of “231” to “240”, which is smaller than the number of random number values allocated to the variation pattern type CA4-1, is the variation pattern type. Only a value “241” that is smaller than the number of random values assigned to the CA 4-2 and further assigned to the variation pattern type CA 4-1 and the variation pattern type CA 4-2 is allocated to the variation pattern type CA 4-3. By such setting, the average required time from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the time of effect switching can be varied according to the total number of reserved memories. For example, according to the setting in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 135A, the total number of reserved memories is “6” to “8” as compared with the case where the total number of reserved memories is in the range of “0” to “2”. In the case where it is within the range, the average required time until the effect switching timing can be shortened.

  The variation pattern type determination is performed so that the ratios determined for the variation pattern type CA4-1 to the variation pattern type CA4-3 are different between the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B and the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 135D and 135E. Random number MR4 is assigned to each variation pattern type. As an example, if the total number of reserved memories is in the range of “0” to “2”, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 135A, among the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type, “221” to “241”. While the range values are allocated to the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135D, the values in the range of “216” to “241” are the variation pattern types CA4. -1 to the variation pattern type CA4-3. Here, as shown in FIG. 17G, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B may be selected as a use table when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”. On the other hand, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135D and 134E may be selected as a use table when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. With this setting, the special game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is executed, or the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is executed. Depending on whether or not it is done, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern can be varied. For example, according to the settings in the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 135A and the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 135D, compared to the case where the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is executed, The sudden big hit variation pattern can be selected at a higher rate when the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is executed. Note that the special game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is executed as compared to the case where the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is executed. The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern type may be assigned to each variation pattern type so that the sudden big hit variation pattern is selected at a higher rate.

  In the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135A, 135B, 135D, and 135E, the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 136A and 136B, and the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 137A and 137B, the fluctuation pattern type CA4-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA4- The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined to 3 is different. As an example, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A, even if the total number of reserved storages is in any range of “0” to “2”, “3” to “5”, “6” to “8”, The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 to the variation pattern type CA4-3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 136A, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is not allocated to any of the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 136B, “236” to “241” smaller than the number of random numbers assigned to the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3 in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern type CA4-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA4-3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 137A and 137B, “200” to “241” which are larger than the number of random numbers assigned to the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3 in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern type CA4-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA4-3. By such setting, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern can be made different depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state. For example, according to the settings in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A, 136A, and 137A, the sudden big hit variation pattern can be selected at a higher rate in the normal state than in the probable variation state. The sudden big hit variation pattern can be selected only at a lower rate than in the state.

  As shown in FIG. 17G, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 136A shows that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable variation state, the big hit type buffer value is “ If it is “0”, it is selected as a use table. Here, as shown in FIG. 7, the big hit type buffer value is set to “0” when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 136A, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is obtained for the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 including the sudden big hit variation pattern for executing the sudden effect. Not allocated. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state, the sudden big hit variation pattern is not selected and the sudden effect is not executed. . When the variable display result is “big hit” when in the probable change state, if the big hit type is “probable change” or “surprise”, the big hit type If “normal” is set, the time-saving state or the normal state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the probability variation state ends. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” in the probability variation state, the variable display result after the sudden effect is executed in the probability variation state so that the sudden big hit variation pattern is not selected. When the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the game has become a “big hit”, the game is further controlled to a probable change state. Accordingly, it is possible to enhance the player's feeling of joy due to the sudden effect being executed in the probability variation state, and to increase the effect of the sudden effect.

  FIG. 18 shows a configuration example of the loss variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a loss variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 18A and a loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 18B are prepared in advance as loss variation pattern determination tables. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B each determine whether or not to reach the reach display state when it is determined that the variable display result is “losing” and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the determination result of the variation pattern type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern based on the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, it is determined that one of the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-4, variation pattern type CB1-1 to variation pattern type CB1-3, variation pattern type CC1-1 to variation pattern type CC1-3. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the result, and the loss variation pattern determination table 138B is used according to a determination result indicating that one of the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 is selected. Selected as.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 138A, according to the variation pattern type, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern has one or more variations with the variable display result “losing” and the variable display mode “non-reach”. Allocated to the pattern. In the loss variation pattern determination table 138B, according to the variation pattern type, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is allocated to a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It is.

  Here, in the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A, a change pattern PA1-4 such as the variation pattern type CA1-4, the variation pattern type CB1-3, or the variation pattern type CC1-3 is changed. A random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern (see FIG. 10) in which a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which variation is performed once is executed. With such a setting, the variation pattern PA1-4 is selected corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “losing” and the determination result that the variable display mode is “non-reach”, and the “pseudo-continuous” is selected. The specific effects can be executed.

  For the variation pattern type CA1-4, in the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 13A, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type corresponds to the non-reach HA1-1. A value in the range of “217” to “241” is allocated, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is allocated corresponding to the non-reach HA1-2, and corresponding to the non-reach HA1-3. The values in the range of “231” to “241” are assigned, and the values in the range of “237” to “241” are assigned to the non-reach HA1-4 and the non-reach HA1-5, respectively. Yes. Here, with respect to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 8A, the reach determination randomness corresponds to the case where the total number of stored storage is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR3. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 132A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “1”, and the range of “1” to “217” in the random number MR3 for reach determination Value is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 132A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “2”, and the range of “1” to “220” among the random numbers MR3 for reach determination Value is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 132A, the total number of reserved memories corresponds to “3” and “4”, and among the random numbers MR3 for reach determination, “1” to “ A value in the range of “230” is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-5, in the reach determination table 132A, the total reserved storage numbers correspond to “5” to “8”, and “1” to “ A value in the range of “230” is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of stored storages is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-4 is lower than when the total number of stored storages is “0”. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4” or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2”. Compared with the case of “”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-4 is lower.

  In the loss variation pattern setting table 141A shown in FIG. 10, the variable display time in the variation pattern PA1-1 in which the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” and the mission start effect are not executed is 12000 milliseconds [ms], and the variation pattern PA1-2 The variable display time is set to 7000 milliseconds [ms], and the variable display time in the variation pattern PA1-3 is set to 5500 milliseconds [ms]. On the other hand, the variable display time in the variation pattern PA1-4 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed is set to 24000 milliseconds [ms]. Further, the variable display time in the variation pattern PA1-5 in which the mission start effect is executed is set to 32000 milliseconds [ms]. That is, when the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display time in the variation pattern PA1-4 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed and the variation pattern PA1-5 in which the mission start effect is executed The variable display time is longer than the variable display time in the variation pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect and the mission start effect are not executed. Then, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, it is determined as the variation pattern type CA1-4 for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect and the mission start effect as compared with the case of “0”. The ratio is low, and when the total number of reserved storages is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-4 is lower than when the total number is “3” or less. . Thus, the average variable display time can be shortened when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIGS. 19, 20 </ b> A and 20 </ b> B show configuration examples of the big hit variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 139A shown in FIG. 19, the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 139B shown in FIG. 20 (A), and the big hit fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 20 (B). A determination table 139C is prepared in advance. Each of the big hit variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139C has a variable pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type, the determination result of the variable pattern type, etc., when it is determined that the variable display result is controlled as the big hit gaming state. Is a table that is referred to for determining a variation pattern based on a random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern. Each of the big hit variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139C is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the jackpot variation pattern determination table 139A is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that any one of the variation pattern types CA3-1 to variation pattern types CA3-4, and the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4. -3B is selected as a usage table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of −3 is selected, and depending on the determination result indicating that either the variation pattern type CA5-1 or the variation pattern type CA5-2 is selected. The big hit variation pattern determination table 139C is selected as the usage table. In each of the big hit variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139C, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is allocated to a plurality of types of variation patterns whose variable display result is “big hit” according to the variation pattern type.

  In the setting of the big hit variation pattern determination table 139B shown in FIG. 20A, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 in the specific effect of “pseudo train” corresponding to the variation pattern type CA4-1 of “sudden short”. A random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern PT1-4 and variation pattern PT4-4 that execute the sudden effect when the chance stop is displayed. Corresponding to the variation pattern type CA4-2 of “sudden middle”, the variation pattern PT2-3 and variation pattern PT2- that execute the sudden effect after the re-variation is performed once in the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. 5, variation pattern PT5-3, variation pattern PT5-5, variation patterns PT2-7 and PT5-7 for executing sudden effects after re-variation is performed twice in the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. A random number value MR5 for determination is assigned. Further, in response to the variation pattern type CA4-3 of “sudden long”, the variation pattern PT3-1 and variation pattern PT3- that execute the sudden effect after the re-variation is performed twice in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. 3, variation pattern PT3-5, variation pattern PT6-1, variation pattern PT6-3, variation pattern PT6-5, and variation in which sudden variation is executed after re-variation is performed three times in a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” A random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern is allocated to the pattern PT3-4, the variation pattern PT3-6, the variation pattern PT6-4, and the variation pattern PT6-6. Accordingly, when the variation pattern type CA4-1 of “sudden short” is determined, any of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped before the re-variation is started in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. There is only a possibility of switching to the sudden effect when displayed, and the sudden effect is not executed after the re-change. On the other hand, when the variation pattern type CA4-2 of “sudden middle” or the variation pattern type CA4-3 of “sudden long” is determined, the re-variation is once in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. An abrupt effect may be executed after being performed three times. Further, in the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3, the allocation of the random value MR5 to the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is different from each other. Thereby, according to the timing when switching to the sudden effect is performed, the number of times of temporary stop display of any one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8 in the specific effect of “pseudo ream” or the decorative pattern displayed temporarily stop The number of times of re-variation can be varied.

  In these loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B and jackpot variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139C, the variation pattern to which the random value MR5 for variation pattern determination is assigned according to the variation pattern type is included in the variation pattern type. Fluctuation pattern. As an example, a variation pattern PA1-1 in which all random number values MR5 are allocated according to the variation pattern type CA1-1 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 18A is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1. The variation pattern is included. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B and the big hit variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139C are based on the determination result of the variation pattern type, and are selected from one or more types of variation patterns included in the variation pattern type. This is a table for selecting a variation pattern in variable display.

  In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, game control as shown in FIG. 21, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A data holding area 150 is provided. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 21 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are reserved data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). .

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the winning order to the second starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are reserved data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). .

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which game ball has won in either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, so that the order of winning of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151C stores “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening or “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second starting winning opening. The game ball is stored in association with the hold number according to the winning order of each game ball.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S15 of FIG. 40 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. The ordinary symbol process flag is selected and executed in the ordinary symbol process performed in step S16 of FIG. 40 in order to control the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol indicator 20. Tell what to do.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the game is cleared and turned off in response to the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. The probability change flag is set to an on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to a probability change state, while being cleared to an off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the time reduction state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the completion of the time reduction state. .

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as the variable symbol display time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The usual figure variation timer is for measuring the time for controlling the progress of the usual figure game such as the variable display time of the normal symbol in the usual figure game on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a round number counter, and the like.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104, so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as random count values. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a jackpot type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. In response to the execution of the special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, “2” is set to the variable special figure designation buffer value. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is any one of a plurality of types such as “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprise”. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 7, if the jackpot type is “normal”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0” and the jackpot type is “probable change”. For example, “1” is set to the big hit type buffer value, and “2” is set to the big hit type buffer value if the big hit type is “surprise”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal to the sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14. On the other hand, wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal is connected. Furthermore, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal from the operation button 30 is also connected to the effect control board 12.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, for temporary stop symbol determination before re-lottery Random number value SR2, random number values SR3-1 to SR3-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, random value SR4 for determining the notice pattern type, and disorder for determining the first to third notice patterns Numerical data indicating each of the numerical values SR5-1 to SR5-3 is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3-1 to SR3-3, SR4, SR5-1 to SR5-3. I just need it. The effect control CPU 120 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. 39, for example, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3-1 to SR3-3, SR4, SR5-1 to SR5-3 may be counted. When the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 uses a random counter to select random values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3-1 to SR3-3, Numerical data indicating all of SR4, SR5-1 to SR5-3 may be counted.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “decided” symbols that are variable display results of the ornament symbols, “left”, “middle”, “right” in the image display device 5. ”Is a random number value used for determining a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) derived and displayed on the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R when the variable symbol variable display ends. These are the three decorative designs. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol before the re-lottery is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols before the re-lottery effect is executed when the re-lottery effect is executed. This is a random value used to determine the decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the sections 5L, 5C, and 5R, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random numbers SR3-1 to SR3-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed on each of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo-random temporary stop symbol determination random value SR3-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo-simultaneous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR3-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  The random value SR4 for determining the notice pattern type is used to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect, and to determine any one of a plurality of kinds of prepared notice pattern types when the notice effect is executed. It is a random value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random numbers SR5-1 to SR5-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns are random values used for determining any one of a plurality of types of prepared notice patterns. As an example, the random number value SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect to be “serif notice”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “499”. The random number SR5-2 for determining the second notice pattern is used to decide the notice pattern in the notice effect to be “monitor notice” and takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random number value SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern is used to decide the notice pattern in the notice effect that becomes the “step-up notice”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  23A to 23D show configuration examples of final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160D stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are tables for determining a fixed decorative symbol that is one of a predetermined non-reach combination and mission start chance items MC1 to MC8. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 160A includes a left final stop symbol FZ1-1 that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L among the finalized symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. Is a table referred to in order to determine the value based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 160A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. . The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes a right final stop symbol FZ1-2, which is a finalized symbol to be stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R among the finalized symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determination based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the second final stop symbol determination random number SR1-2. In the final stop symbol determination table 160B, according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the second random number SR1-2 for determining the final stop symbol is It is assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes medium final stop symbols FZ1-3 that are final ornament symbols that are stopped and displayed by the “medium” ornament symbol display unit 5C among the predetermined ornament symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determination based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like.

  The ROM 121 includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 24. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the left / right outcome type DC1-1 is LR0. , LR11 to LR18 and LR31 to LR38 are determined. In the final stop symbol determination table 160C, the random value SR1- for determining the third final stop symbol is determined according to the determination result as to which of the left and right outcome types DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, and LR31 to LR38. 3 is assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B, the second final stop is provided in a portion where the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. The random number value SR1-2 for design determination is not allocated. With such a setting, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as a final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol combination is a reach combination or jackpot combination (except for the chance of winning chances TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. In the final stop symbol determination table 160C, the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is a combination of predetermined decorative symbols. The random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 3A, the part that becomes the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 shown in FIG. A random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is included in the portion that becomes the odd chance TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. Is not allocated. The combination of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 25 includes the same decorative symbols as the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, for example, and the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, The decorative pattern is likely to be mistaken by the player as one of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, the mission start chances MC1 to MC8, or the odd chance chances TC1 to TC4, such as the arrangement order of the decorative patterns in 5R is different. Contains combinations. With such a setting, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, a mission start chance item MC1 to MC8, or a random chance item. TC1 to TC4, and a certain non-reach combination similar to these chances can be avoided.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D displays “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol displays when the mission start effect is executed during variable display of decorative symbols whose variable display result is “losing”. A chance to start a mission based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol for the combination of the final decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, FZ1-6 in the parts 5L, 5C, and 5R This table is referred to in order to determine one of the eyes MC1 to MC8. In the final stop symbol determination table 160D, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to the mission start chance MC1 to MC8.

  FIGS. 26A and 26B show configuration examples of the final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 162A includes a left final stop symbol FZ2-1 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L among the finalized decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations, and “ Reference is made to determine the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final symbol to be stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R, based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table to be. In the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the first random symbol SR1-1 for determining the final final stop symbol is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 (left and right final stop symbol FZ2). -1, FZ2-2) are assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a third final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is a final symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “medium” symbol display unit 5C among the final symbols that are reach-losing combinations. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value SR1-3 for stop symbol determination.

  The middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that are the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. That is, in the variable display of decorative symbols, variation of decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and “left” → “right” → “ In the case of deriving and displaying a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol in a predetermined order such as “middle”, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C from which the decorative symbol is derived and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 derived and displayed on the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used to select “ The difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed on the “medium” decorative symbol display section 5C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a determined decorative symbol that is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed on the “medium” decorative symbol display unit 5C is determined. In the final stop symbol determination table 162B, when the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is either the variation pattern PA2-1 or the variation pattern PA2-2, any of the variation pattern PA3-3 to the variation pattern PA3-3 is selected. , The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is a symbol difference “−2”, depending on each of the variation patterns PA3-4 to PA3-7. “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” are allocated.

  27A to 27C show configuration examples of the final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C are tables for determining a definite decorative symbol that is one of the big hit combinations and the chances of success TC1 to TC4. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 163A is stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as the fixed ornament symbols that are normally a big hit combination. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the random numbers SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol are the same as the symbol numbers “1” of the normal symbols whose left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are the same. 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 8 ”. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the left and middle symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed as finalized symbols that are probable big hit combinations. It is a table referred to for determining the right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, and the symbol number “ 1 ”,“ 3 ”,“ 5 ”, and“ 7 ”. The final stop symbol determination table 163C includes left center right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine the combination of the determined decorative symbols to be one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 163C, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to the chances of success TC1 to TC4.

  FIG. 28 shows a configuration example of a temporary stop symbol determination table used to determine a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. In this embodiment, a temporary stop symbol determination table 164A shown in FIG. 28A is used as a temporary stop symbol determination table for determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. A temporary stop symbol determination table 164B shown in FIG. 28 (B) and a temporary stop symbol determination table 164C shown in FIG. 28 (C) are prepared in advance and stored in the ROM 121. As shown in FIG. 29, each temporary stop symbol determination table 164A to 164C includes a variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol based on the first start condition or the second start condition being established once. It is selected as a usage table according to the number of fluctuations.

  In the temporary stop symbol determination table 164A, in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, the first pseudo continuous time The random value SR3-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol is allocated to the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 configured by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. Here, in the temporary stop symbol determination table 164A, when the same decorative symbol as the left final stop symbol is the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a decorative symbol different from the left final stop symbol is the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1. Compared to the case, a larger number of random values SR3-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol are allocated. In such a setting, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 and the left final stop symbol among the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped when the final pseudo continuous variation is executed may be the same decorative symbol. Rise. As a result, the final pseudo continuous variation is executed, so that the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L are not changed, while the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5C are changed. The decorative design that is stopped and displayed on 5R is changed, and the impression that the variable display state approaches the reach state is given to the player by the continuous display of the decorative design, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can. In the temporary stop symbol determination table 164A, when the left final stop symbol is a normal symbol such as “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 is “1”. , “3”, “5”, “7”, and so on, the pseudo-simultaneous chance symbols GC1, GC3, GC5, and GC7 that are probabilistic variation symbols are not determined. A numerical value SR3-1 is assigned. As a result, from the state where the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 becomes a probability variable symbol and becomes a probability variable big hit combination, the left final stop symbol becomes a normal symbol and there is no possibility of becoming a probability variable big hit combination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the expectation that the big hit type is “probable change” from being reduced.

  In the temporary stop symbol determination table 164B, the combination of the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, the right stop symbol KZ2-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 determined by using the temporary stop symbol determination table 164A is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1. The random number SR3-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is configured by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2, and KZ3-3, depending on which of the two is GC8. Are assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. In the temporary stop symbol determination table 164C, the combination of the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 164B is a pseudo consecutive chance. Depending on which of GC1 to GC8, the random number SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is determined by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3. Allocated to the configured pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8.

  FIG. 30 shows a configuration example of the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 used to determine a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery effect is started when the re-lottery effect is executed. ing. The temporary stop symbol determination table 165 may be stored in the ROM 121. In the temporary stop symbol determination table 165, the same left middle right that is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as the final symbol combination to be a big hit combination. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3, The symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are allocated.

  FIG. 31 shows a configuration example of the notice pattern type determination table 166 stored in the ROM 121. The notice pattern type determination table 166 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect and to determine the notice pattern type in the case of executing the notice effect. In the advance notice pattern type determination table 166, according to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command, the random number value SR4 for determining the advance notice pattern type indicates that there is no advance effect or any of the advance notice pattern type CY1 to the advance notice pattern type CY3. It has been allocated. Here, the notice pattern type CY1 is a notice pattern type for executing a notice effect to be a “line notice”. The notice pattern type CY2 is a notice pattern type for executing a notice effect as a “monitor notice”. The notice pattern type CY3 is a notice pattern type for executing a notice effect as a “step-up notice”.

  In the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, the allocation of the random value SR4 in the case where the variation pattern PT1-1 or the variation pattern PT4-1 executes the sudden effect during the variation of all symbols and the variable display result is “ The allocation is the same as when the variation display PA1-1, the variation pattern PA1-2, the variation pattern PB1-1, and the variation pattern PC1-1 are “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Yes. With this setting, when the sudden effect is executed during the variation of all symbols, the variation pattern PA1-1, the variation pattern PA1-2, the variation pattern PB1-1, and the variation pattern PC1-1 are used. The presence / absence of the notice effect and the notice pattern type can be determined at the same ratio.

  In the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, the fluctuation pattern PT1-4, the fluctuation pattern PT2-3, the fluctuation pattern PT2-5, and the fluctuation pattern PT2-5 are executed. When the random number SR4 is assigned to the variable pattern PT4-4, the variable pattern PT5-3, or the variable pattern PT5-5, the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach” In the case of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the same allocation is performed. With such a setting, when the sudden effect is executed after the re-change is performed once in the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous”, the presence / absence of the notice effect at the same rate as in the case of the change pattern PA1-4. And a notice pattern type can be determined.

  In the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, any one of the fluctuation pattern PT2-1, the fluctuation pattern PT2-4, the fluctuation pattern PT5-1, and the fluctuation pattern PT5-4 that executes the sudden effect when the mission start effect is performed. When the allocation of the random number SR4 in a certain case is the variation pattern PA1-5 in which the mission start effect is executed when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the same allocation It has become. With this setting, when the sudden effect is executed when the mission start effect is performed, the presence / absence of the notice effect and the type of the notice pattern can be determined at the same rate as in the case of the variation pattern PA1-5. it can.

  In the setting of the notice pattern classification determination table 166, after the reach display state of the normal reach is started after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach display state, the decorative symbol (the middle symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display portion 5C of “medium” is displayed. ), When the random number SR4 is assigned to either the variation pattern PT2-2 or the variation pattern PT5-2 in which the sudden effect is performed during the variation, the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach” In this case, the allocation is the same as that of the variation pattern PA2-1 or the variation pattern PA2-2 for executing the reach effect of the normal reach. With such a setting, when the sudden effect is executed when the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the notice effect is produced at the same rate as in the case of either the change pattern PA2-1 or the change pattern PA2-2. Presence / absence and type of notice pattern can be determined.

  In the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, the random number value SR4 for determining the notice pattern type is allocated only to the notice pattern type CY1 depending on the case of either the change pattern PT1-2 or the change pattern PT4-2. ing. With such a setting, when the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is either the variation pattern PT1-2 or the variation pattern PT4-2, the announcement pattern for executing the announcement effect that becomes the “line announcement”. The type can be determined as CY1. Further, in the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, the random number value SR4 for determining the notice pattern type is set only in the notice pattern type CY2 according to the case where either the change pattern PT1-3 or the change pattern PT4-3 is set. Allocated. With such a setting, when the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is either the variation pattern PT1-3 or the variation pattern PT4-3, the advance notice pattern for executing the advance notice effect as the “monitor advance notice”. The type can be determined as CY2.

  In the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, a sudden effect is produced when a sudden change effect is executed after a re-change is performed twice or more in a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” or a super reach reach effect is performed. The variation in which the random effect SR4 is assigned in the same manner as in the case of any one of the variation pattern to be executed and the variation pattern in which the sudden effect is executed when the sudden mode start effect is performed. The same allocation as in the case of the pattern (“other than the above” in FIG. 31). With such a setting, the effect mode until the sudden effect is executed is the same, and for a plurality of variation patterns with different presence or absence of the sudden effect, the presence or absence of the notice effect and the type of the notice pattern are determined at the same rate. be able to.

  32 to 34 show configuration examples of the notice pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121. FIG. In this embodiment, a notice pattern determination table 167A shown in FIG. 32, a notice pattern determination table 167B shown in FIG. 33, and a notice pattern determination table 167C shown in FIG. Yes. The notice pattern determination table 167A is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of kinds of notice patterns when the notice pattern type CY1 is determined. The notice pattern determination table 167B is a table that is referred to in order to decide one of a plurality of kinds of notice patterns when the notice pattern type CY2 is decided. The notice pattern determination table 167C is a table that is referred to in order to decide one of a plurality of kinds of notice patterns when the notice pattern type CY3 is decided.

  In this embodiment, the notice patterns YP1-1 to YP1-5 are prepared in advance as the notice patterns for executing the notice effect to be “serif notice”. In addition, notice patterns YP2-1 to YP2-5 are prepared in advance as the notice patterns for executing the notice effect to be “monitor notice”. Furthermore, the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4 are prepared in advance as the notice patterns for executing the notice effect as the “step-up notice”.

  In the notice pattern determination table 167A, the random value SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern is assigned to the notice pattern YP1-1 to the notice pattern YP1-5 according to the variation pattern. Also, in the notice pattern determination table 167A, when the notice effect by each notice pattern is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” (the big hit reliability of the notice effect) is the lowest in the notice pattern YP1-1. The random number SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern is set to the notice pattern YP1- so that the notice pattern YP1-2, the notice pattern YP1-3, the notice pattern YP1-4, and the notice pattern YP1-5 increase in this order. 1 to the notice pattern YP1-5. In the advance notice pattern determination table 167B, the random number value SR5-2 for determining the second advance notice pattern is allocated to the advance notice pattern YP2-1 to the advance notice pattern YP2-5 according to the variation pattern. In the notice pattern determination table 167B, the jackpot reliability of the notice effect is the lowest in the notice pattern YP2-1, and the notice pattern YP2-2, the notice pattern YP2-3, the notice pattern YP2-4, and the notice pattern YP2-5. Random value SR5-2 for determining the second notice pattern is assigned to notice pattern YP2-1 to notice pattern YP2-5 so as to increase in order. In the notice pattern determination table 167C, the random value SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern is allocated to the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4 according to the variation pattern. Further, in the notice pattern determination table 167C, the jackpot reliability of the notice effect is lowest in the notice pattern YP3-1 and increases in the order of the notice pattern YP3-2, the notice pattern YP3-3, and the notice pattern YP3-4. The random number SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern is allocated to the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, the allocation of the random value SR5-1 in the case of any one of the variation pattern PT1-1 and the variation pattern PT4-1 that executes the sudden effect during all symbol variations is a variable display result. The same allocation is made when the variation display PA1-1, the variation pattern PA1-2, the variation pattern PB1-1, or the variation pattern PC1-1 is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. ing. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, when the sudden effect is executed during the variation of all symbols, the variation pattern PA1-1, the variation pattern PA1-2, the variation pattern PB1-1, or the variation pattern PC1-1 is selected. Are determined to be either the notice pattern YP1-1 or the notice pattern YP1-2.

  With the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, the fluctuation pattern PT1-4, the fluctuation pattern PT2-3, the fluctuation pattern PT2-5, the fluctuation pattern that execute the sudden effect after the re-fluctuation is performed once in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the fluctuation When the random number SR5-1 is assigned to the pattern PT4-4, the variation pattern PT5-3, or the variation pattern PT5-5, the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. In this case, the allocation is the same as that in the case of the variation pattern PA1-4 for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, when the sudden effect is executed after the re-change is performed once in the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the notice pattern YP1 is the same rate as the case of the change pattern PA1-4. -1 and the notice pattern YP1-2.

  The setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A is any one of the variation pattern PT2-1, the variation pattern PT2-4, the variation pattern PT5-1, and the variation pattern PT5-4 that execute the sudden effect when the mission start effect is performed. In this case, the allocation of the random number SR5-1 is the same allocation as when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach” and the variation pattern PA1-5 is for executing the mission start effect. It has become. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, when the sudden start effect is executed when the mission start effect is performed, the notice pattern YP1-1 and the notice pattern YP1-2 are in the same ratio as in the case of the variation pattern PA1-5. Decide on either.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, after the reach display state of the normal reach is started after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach display state, the decorative symbol (the middle symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display portion 5C of “medium”) is set. In the case of any one of the fluctuation pattern PT2-2 and the fluctuation pattern PT5-2 in which the sudden effect is executed during the fluctuation, the allocation of the random value SR5-1 is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach” ", The allocation is the same as that of the variation pattern PA2-1 or the variation pattern PA2-2 for executing the reach effect of the normal reach. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, when the sudden effect is executed when the reach effect of normal reach is executed, the notice is given at the same rate as the case of either the change pattern PA2-1 or the change pattern PA2-2. The pattern YP1-2 is determined as one of the notice patterns YP1-4.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, the random value SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern is only the notice pattern YP1-1 according to the case where it is either the change pattern PT1-2 or the change pattern PT4-2. Allocated to In the variation pattern PT1-2 and the variation pattern PT4-2, the operation effective period is set when the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 (see FIG. 36) in the notice pattern YP1-1 is performed, and the operation is performed within the operation effective period. Switching to the sudden effect is performed at the timing when the operation of the button 30 is detected. On the other hand, when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation effective period, when the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is finished, switching to the sudden effect is performed. In the variation pattern PT1-2, after the determined effect symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed when the sudden effect is ended, the determined ornament symbol is continuously displayed until the variable symbol display time elapses. Further, in the variation pattern PT4-2, after the sudden effect is finished, the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is continued until the re-lottery effect is started.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, the variable pattern PT2-6, the variable pattern PT3-, which execute the sudden effect at the time of super reach development in which the reach effect of the super reach α is started after the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is set to the reach display state. 5. Fluctuation pattern PT5-6, fluctuation pattern PT6-5, fluctuation pattern PT2-7 for executing the sudden effect during the third fluctuation after the second fluctuation is performed in the “pseudo-continuous” specific presentation and the fluctuation When the random number SR5-1 is assigned to any of the patterns PT5-7, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach α when the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”. The allocation is the same as that of any of PA 3-1 to variation pattern PA 3-3. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, any one of the variation pattern PA3-1 to the variation pattern PA3-3 is performed when switching from the effect mode similar to the case where the reach effect of the super reach α is performed to the sudden effect. Is determined to be one of the notice pattern YP1-2 to the notice pattern YP1-4 at the same rate as in the case of.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, a variable pattern PT3-2 for executing a stunning effect at the time of super reach introduction in which the introduction part in the reach effect of the super reach β is performed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to the reach display state, the variable pattern PT3-6, fluctuation pattern PT6-2, fluctuation pattern PT6-6, fluctuation pattern PT3-1 that executes sudden effects after the re-variation is performed twice or more in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, fluctuation pattern PT3- 3. When the variable pattern PT3-4, the fluctuation pattern PT6-1, the fluctuation pattern PT6-3, or the fluctuation pattern PT6-4 is any of the random number SR5-1, the variable display result is variable and “variable”. Fluctuating pattern that executes the reach effect of super reach β when the display mode is “reach” The same allocation as that of any one of the pattern PA3-4 to the fluctuation pattern PA3-7. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, any one of the variation pattern PA3-4 to the variation pattern PA3-7 is performed when switching from the production mode similar to the case where the reach production of the super reach β is performed to the sudden production. Is determined to be one of the notice pattern YP1-2 to the notice pattern YP1-4 at the same rate as in the case of.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, the allocation of the random number SR5-1 in the case of the variation pattern PT1-5 and the variation pattern PT4-5 that execute the sudden effect when the surprise mode start effect is performed is as follows: The same allocation as when the variable display result is any one of the fluctuation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4 for executing the surprise mode start effect in response to the big hit type and the big hit type being “surprise”. It has become. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, when the switching from the production mode similar to the case where the suddenness mode start production is executed to the sudden production is performed, it is one of the variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4. The notice pattern YP1-1 to the notice pattern YP1-5 is determined at the same rate as the case.

  Even in the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167B, the effect form until the sudden effect is executed is the same, and for a plurality of variation patterns with different presence or absence of the sudden effect, the random value SR5-2 for determining the second notice pattern is used. Allocation is the same allocation. By such setting, the effect mode until the sudden effect is executed becomes the same, and a plurality of variation patterns with different presence or absence of the sudden effect are in the same ratio with the notice pattern YP2-1 to the notice pattern YP2-5. Either can be determined. Further, in the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167B, the random number value SR5-2 for determining the second notice pattern is changed to the notice pattern YP2- according to the case where it is either the change pattern PT1-3 or the change pattern PT4-3. Allocated only to 1. In the variation pattern PT1-3 and the variation pattern PT4-3, the operation effective period is set when the button operation promotion effect BN2-1 (see FIG. 36) in the notice pattern YP2-1 is performed, and the operation is performed within the operation effective period. At the timing when the operation of the button 30 is detected, switching to the sudden effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation effective period, the switch to the sudden effect is performed when the button operation promotion effect BN2-1 ends. In the variation patterns PT1-3, after the sudden effect is finished, the definite decorative symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed, and then the definite decorative symbol derivation display is continued until the decorative symbol variable display time elapses. Further, in the variation pattern PT4-3, after the sudden effect is completed, the fixed symbol combination of the normal jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed until the re-lottery effect is started.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167C, among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type CA4-2 (see FIG. 9) of “sudden middle”, the variation pattern PT2-3, the variation pattern PT2-5, and the variation pattern PT2-7. , Variation pattern PT5-3, variation pattern PT5-5, variation pattern PT5-7, variation pattern PT3-1 to variation pattern PT3-included in variation pattern type CA4-3 of “suddenly long” 6. The random number SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern for each of the notice patterns YP3-1 to YP3-4 is assigned to each of the notice patterns YP3-1 to YP3-4 in the case of any one of the change patterns PT6-1 to PT6-6. Is different. Further, among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type CA4-2 of “sudden middle”, the variation pattern PT2-1, the variation pattern PT2-2, and the variation pattern PT2-4, and “suddenly long” Even in the case of any one of the fluctuation pattern PT3-1 to the fluctuation pattern PT3-6 and the fluctuation pattern PT6-1 to the fluctuation pattern PT6-6 included in the fluctuation pattern type CA4-3, the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice The allocation of the random number SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern for the pattern YP3-4 is different. Then, the fluctuation pattern PT2-1 to PT2-7, the fluctuation pattern PT5-1 to the fluctuation pattern PT5-7 included in the fluctuation pattern type CA4-2 of “sudden middle”, and the fluctuation pattern type CA4-3 of “suddenly long”. The change pattern PT3-1 to the change pattern PT3-6 and the change pattern PT6-1 to the change pattern PT6-6 included in FIG. Therefore, the ratio determined as one of the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4 is made different according to the timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed by setting such as the notice pattern determination table 167C. Can do.

  The pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 168A as shown in FIG. 35, a notice effect control pattern table 168B as shown in FIG. 36, a mission start effect control pattern table 168C as shown in FIG. Various production control pattern tables 168D as shown in FIG. 38 are included.

  In the symbol variation control pattern table 168A, the variable display of decorative symbols on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as an operation, an effect display operation in a reach effect, and an effect display operation in a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” as a symbol variation control pattern. Each symbol variation control pattern includes various effects according to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in time series. The effect control CPU 120 reads the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command from the symbol variation control pattern table 168A. Then, by transmitting a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data to the display control unit 123, the control content of the effect display operation such as the variable display operation of the decorative design on the display screen of the image display device 5 is instructed. Also, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R is controlled by transmitting a sound effect signal corresponding to the sound control data to the sound control board 13 via the I / O 125 or the like. Further, the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED is controlled by transmitting an illumination signal corresponding to the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 via the I / O 125 or the like.

  Of the symbol variation control patterns stored in symbol variation control pattern table 168A, symbol variation control pattern CPT1-2 corresponding to variation pattern PT1-2 and symbol variation control pattern CPT4-2 corresponding to variation pattern PT4-2. When the button operation promotion effect in the notice effect that becomes a “line notice” is performed, an operation effective period in which the operation of the operation button 30 is effectively detected, and the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period. Production display control data and the like are set so that switching to the sudden production is performed at the timing or when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation valid period, when the button operation promotion production is finished. . In the symbol variation control pattern CPT1-2, after the sudden effect is finished, the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, and then the definite decorative symbol derivation display is continued until the variable symbol display time elapses. As such, effect display control data and the like are set. Further, in the symbol variation control pattern CPT4-2, after the sudden effect is ended, the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is continued until the re-lottery effect is started. In addition, production display control data and the like are set.

  Of the symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 168A, the symbol variation control pattern CPT1-3 corresponding to the variation pattern PT1-3 and the symbol variation control pattern CPT4-3 corresponding to the variation pattern PT4-3. When the button operation promotion effect in the notice effect to be “monitor notice” is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 is entered, and the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period. Production display control data and the like are set so that switching to the sudden production is performed at the timing or when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation valid period, when the button operation promotion production is finished. . In the symbol variation control pattern CPT1-3, after the sudden effect is finished, the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, and then the definite decorative symbol derivation display is continued until the variable symbol display time elapses. As such, effect display control data and the like are set. Further, in the symbol variation control pattern CPT4-3, after the sudden effect is ended, the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped until the re-lottery effect is started. In addition, production display control data and the like are set.

  Note that a plurality of types of symbol variation control pattern table 168A may be provided corresponding to the presentation mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As an example, a plurality of types of symbol variation control corresponding to each of the case where the production mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal production mode, a production mode during probability change, a production mode during time reduction, a mission mode, and a surprise mode A pattern table 168A is provided. In this case, depending on the presentation mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display mode of the background image, the display mode of the decorative pattern (display color, shape, size, character, variation speed, etc.), etc. are different. Control data in the symbol variation control pattern stored in each symbol variation control pattern table 168A may be set in advance.

  In the notice effect control pattern table 168B, data indicating the control content of various effect operations that become the notice effect, such as an effect display operation in the notice effect, corresponding to each of a plurality of kinds of notice patterns, is provided. As long as a plurality of types are stored. Each notice effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations that become notice effects, such as an effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The contents of various effects control, the timing for switching the effects control, and the like may be set in time series.

  The notice effect control pattern table 168B stores a notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 and a notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-1, and corresponds to the notice pattern YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern CYP1-2-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP1-2-2 are stored, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-3-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP1-3- corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-3. 2 is stored, a notice effect control pattern CYP1-4-1 and a notice effect control pattern CYP1-4-2 are stored corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-4, and a notice effect control pattern is provided corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-5. CYP1-5-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP1-5-2 are stored. The notice effect control pattern table 168B stores a notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-1 and a notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern YP2-1, and corresponds to the notice pattern YP2-2. The notice effect control pattern CYP2-2-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP2-2-2 are stored, and the notice effect control pattern CYP2-3-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP2- are associated with the notice pattern YP2-3. 3-2 is stored, the notice effect control pattern CYP2-4-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP2-4-2 are stored corresponding to the notice pattern YP2-4, and the notice effect corresponding to the notice pattern YP2-5 is stored. A control pattern CYP2-5-1 and a notice effect control pattern CYP2-5-2 are stored. Further, the notice effect control pattern table 168B stores the notice effect control pattern CYP3-1 to the notice effect control pattern CYP3-4 corresponding to each of the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4.

  As an example, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 is a button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-1. It consists of data for controlling the execution of BN1-1. Further, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 includes data for setting an operation valid period during which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected effectively when the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is executed. Further, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 includes data for setting so that the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected as invalid when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation valid period. It is out. The notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2 corresponds to the notice pattern YP1-1, and the line YN1- becomes an effect action for notifying the word when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation valid period. 1 is composed of data for controlling the execution of 1. Further, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2 includes data for setting so that the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected as invalid after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period. .

  As another example, the notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-1 is a button operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern YP2-1. It consists of data for controlling the execution of the promotion effect BN2-1. Further, the notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-1 includes data for setting an operation valid period during which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected effectively when the button operation promotion effect BN2-1 is executed. Further, the notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-1 includes data for setting so that the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected as invalid when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation effective period. It is out. The notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-2 displays an effect image indicating a predetermined character or the like in the monitor at the timing when the operation button 30 is detected within the operation valid period, corresponding to the notice pattern YP2-1. It is composed of data for controlling the execution of the monitor YN2-1, which is an effect operation such as displaying it so that it appears. Further, the notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-2 includes data for setting so that the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected as invalid after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period. .

  The notice effect control pattern CYP3-1 includes data for controlling the execution of step-up YN3-1, which is an effect operation such as displaying the effect image of the first step, corresponding to the notice pattern YP3-1. ing. Here, in the notice pattern YP3-1, after the step-up YN3-1 is executed, the notice effect is ended without switching the effect image (step-up image) in the notice effect. The notice effect control pattern CYP3-2 switches to step-up YN3-2, which is an effect operation such as displaying the effect image of the second step, following step-up YN3-1, corresponding to the notice pattern YP3-2. It is comprised from the data for controlling. The notice effect control pattern CYP3-3 corresponds to the notice pattern YP3-3, and is a step that becomes an effect operation such as displaying an effect image of the third step following the step-up YN3-1 and the step-up YN3-2. It consists of data for controlling to switch to UP YN3-3. The notice effect control pattern CYP3-4 corresponds to the notice pattern YP3-4, and after the step up YN3-1 and step up YN3-2, the effect of the third step is different from the step up YN3-3. It consists of data for controlling to switch to step-up YN3-4, which is an effect operation such as displaying an image.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167C as shown in FIG. 34, the ratio determined as one of the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4 according to the timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed, It is different. The notice pattern YP3-1 or the notice pattern YP3-2 differs from the notice pattern YP3-3 or the notice pattern YP3-4 in the number of times of performing the effect operation switching in the notice effect that is the “step-up notice”. Yes. In addition, the notice pattern YP3-3 and the notice pattern YP3-4 have the same number of times of changing the effect operation in the notice effect, but the effect modes in the effect operation performed after the change are different. Therefore, according to the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167C, according to the timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed, the determination ratio of the number of times that the effect operation is switched in the notice effect, and the effect in the effect operation performed after the change are performed. The determination ratio of the aspect can be varied.

  The mission start effect control pattern table 168C only needs to store a plurality of types of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the mission start effect as the mission start effect control pattern. Each mission start effect control pattern includes, for example, a mission control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, an end code, etc. It is configured from control data for controlling various performance operations according to the contents, and the contents of various performance controls, switching timing of the performance control, and the like may be set in time series. The effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a fluctuation pattern PA1-5, a fluctuation pattern PA6-5, a fluctuation pattern PA9-5, a fluctuation pattern PT2-1, a fluctuation pattern PT2-4, a fluctuation pattern shown in the fluctuation pattern designation command. In the case of a variation pattern for executing a mission start effect, such as when the pattern PT5-1 or the variation pattern PT5-4 is selected, the content of the mission to be notified by the mission start effect is determined, and the determination result is handled. The mission start effect control pattern is read from the mission start effect control pattern table 168C. Then, by transmitting commands and signals corresponding to various control data included in the mission start effect control pattern to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, control of the effect operation in the mission start effect is performed. The content is instructed and the production operation is controlled.

  The various effect control pattern table 168D only needs to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls during the period when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Each effect control pattern corresponds to the progress of the effect operation in the big hit gaming state such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, end code, etc. The contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like may be set in time series.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 39, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 39 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating flag values and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers that are used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining timing for switching effect images to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Control for. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an input port for capturing various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30, and effect control. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the substrate 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. CPU103 which performed such game control main processing will perform the game control timer interruption process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40, if the interruption request signal from CTC is received and an interruption request | requirement is received.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to detect input from each switch 21, 22A, 22B, 23, etc. via the switch circuit 110. The state of the signal is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating at least a part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. In the normal symbol process, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state or in the short time state, the setting is made to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the second start winning opening as compared to the normal state. And control is performed. For example, when the state is the probability variation state or the short-time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol variable display time to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the normal symbol variable display in each regular game. Control for improving the probability that the result is “per normal” than in the normal state, the tilting time of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” For example, a control for making the length longer than that in the normal state, a control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state, or a setting for performing a combination of these controls is performed.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. When the command control process is finished, the game control timer interrupt process is finished after the interrupt is permitted.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 40 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S100). FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 42, the CPU 103 first corresponds to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A among the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided in the ON state is on (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the first reserved storage number that is the number of the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. Is determined to be a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the first reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number count value ( Step S203). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step S204). . Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, whereby each random number value is stored (step S205). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address (first address) of the first start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, etc., to transmit the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S206). The first start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After the process of step S206 is executed, the total pending storage number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the total pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S207). Then, “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S208). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved memory number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S209). . The reserved memory number notification command set in this way follows the first start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 40 after the special symbol process process ends. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  If the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), or if the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes) ) Or, after the process of step S209 is executed, the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the ON state. Is determined (step S210). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in an OFF state (step S210; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S210; Yes), it is the number of the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. 2. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved memories is a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S211). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the second reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S211 (step S211; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S211; No), the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number count value. (Step S212). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step S213). . Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, whereby each random number value is stored (step S214). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the second start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed. (Step S215). The second start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After the process of step S215 is executed, the total reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (step S216), for example, by adding 1 to the total reserved memory number count value. Then, “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S217). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S218). . The reserved memory number notification command set in this way follows the second start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 40 after the special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. After the start winning determination process as described above is executed, one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 shown in FIG. 41 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 151A and the second special symbol storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not a first start condition for starting or a second start condition for starting a special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, whether the variable display result of the special symbol, the decorative symbol, the color symbol, etc. is controlled as the big hit gaming state as “big hit”. A determination is made whether or not. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (the jackpot symbol and the special symbol game in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). One of the lost symbols) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, based on a pre-determined result whether or not the variable display result is a “big hit”, a reach determined result whether or not the variable display state of the decorative design is a reach display state, etc. A process of determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like are included.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and after the special symbol starts variable display. The process of measuring the elapsed time is included. It is also determined whether the elapsed time thus measured has reached the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the variable display time is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for performing settings, a process for performing settings for transmitting a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12, and the like are included. Note that the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative design is specified. When the display time is reached, the determined decorative design may be confirmed by completely stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative design without receiving the effect control command from the main board 11. In the special symbol stop process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. If the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special chart process flag is set. Is updated to “4”. When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, an upper limit of a period during which the big prize opening is in an open state may be set corresponding to the setting of the maximum number of big prize opening times. As an example, when the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening is set to “15” corresponding to the 15 round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. On the other hand, if the maximum value for the number of times a big winning opening is opened is set to “2” corresponding to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. Set to.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. And when returning a special winning opening to a closed state, the process etc. which stop supply of the drive signal with respect to a predetermined solenoid should just be performed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state by the effect electric parts such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. For example, a process for waiting until the waiting time has elapsed and a process for performing various settings corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 43 (A), first, the CPU 103 first and second reserved memories based on the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. It is determined whether or not the total reserved storage number that is the total number is “0” (step S241). At this time, if the total reserved storage number is other than “0” (step S241; No), start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (step S242). At this time, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C may be read.

  Following the processing of step S242, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved storage number count value, the total reserved storage number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C uses the hold number “1”. The storage contents of the start data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted upward by one entry (step S243). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in step S242 is “first” or “second” (step S244).

  If it is determined in step S244 that the start data is “first” (step S244; first), a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. In response to the establishment of the 1 start condition, the variable special figure designation buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” (step S245). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S244 that the start data is “second” (step S244; second), a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In response to the establishment of the second start condition, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S246).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S245 and S246, the hold data is read from the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start-up data read in step S242 (step S247). For example, when the start data is “first”, as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a random value for determining the special figure display result The numerical data indicating MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read out. On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is used for determining the special figure display result. The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 and the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 are respectively read out.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S247, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start data is decremented by 1, and the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the hold number “ The stored contents of the pending data stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “8” are shifted up by one entry (step S248). For example, when the start data is “first”, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored content of the held data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. Let On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the second reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored contents of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B are stored one entry at a time. Shift to the top.

  Following the processing of step S248, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the start data is selected and set as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”. (Step S249). For example, if the start data is “first”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6A is set as the use table, while if the start data is “second”, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in B) is set as a use table. The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table set in this manner, and the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random value MR1 read in step S247 matches the jackpot determination value data. It is determined whether or not (step S250).

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit decision value data in step S250 (step S250; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S251). ). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S252). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 read in step S247, the jackpot type is set to “normal” or “probable change” by referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S252. ”Or“ Sudden Probability ”is determined as one of the big hit types (step S253). When the special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S246, the big hit type determination random number MR2 is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type determination table 131. Therefore, the jackpot type will not be determined as “surprising”. In the process of step S253, the jackpot type buffer value may be set to any one of “0” to “2” corresponding to the determined jackpot type.

  After the process of step S253 is executed, the maximum value of the number of times of winning a prize opening is set (step S254). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), if the jackpot type buffer value set in step S253 is either “0” or “1”, the maximum value for the number of times that the big winning opening is opened is 15 times. Set to “15” corresponding to the open game. The jackpot type buffer value is set to “0” when the jackpot type determined in step S253 is “normal”, and when the jackpot type determined in step S253 is “probable change”, “ 1 ”. On the other hand, if the jackpot type buffer value set in step S253 is “2”, the maximum value for the number of times that the big winning opening is opened is set to “2” corresponding to the twice-open game. The jackpot type buffer value is set to “2” when the jackpot type determined in step S253 is “surprise”.

  In step S250, when the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value data (step S250; No), after executing the process of step S254, whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state is determined in advance. A confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the result and the determination result of the jackpot type (step S255). As an example, if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit decision value data in step S250, the loss pattern corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost” The special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit decision value data in step S250, “1”, “3”, which become big hit symbols, according to the big hit type decision result in step S253. , One of the special symbols indicating the number “7” is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “normal”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S255, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S256), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S241 (step S241; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S257), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 44, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probable change state or a short-time state, a variation special figure designation buffer value, and a big hit Based on the type buffer value, in accordance with the table selection setting shown in FIG. 17G, as a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E, 136A to 136C, One of 137A to 137C is selected and set (step S262). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified from the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, FIG. In accordance with the table selection setting shown, one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach display state (step S263). At this time, for example, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S264). Subsequently, the random value MR3 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S265). Then, based on the reach determination random value MR3 extracted in step S265, the presence / absence of the reach state is determined by referring to one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C set in step S263 (step S266). .

  Following the processing in step S266, it is determined whether the determination result in step S266 is the variable display mode “reach” or “non-reach” (step S267). At this time, if the determination result is “reach” as the variable display mode (step S267; reach), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, FIG. Reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C as use tables for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Is selected and set (step S268). On the other hand, when the determination result in step S266 is a determination result in which the variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S267; non-reach), the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability change state, and 13A to 13C as usage tables for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. ) To select and set any one of the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C (step S269).

  After performing any of the processes of steps S262, S268, and S269, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S270). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S270, by referring to the use table set in any one of steps S262, S268, S269, the variation pattern type is selected from any of a plurality of types. (Step S271). As an example, in step S262, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIGS. 15 (A) and 15 (B), FIGS. 16 (A) and (B), FIGS. 17 (B), (D) and (E), When any one of 135B, 135D, 135E, 136B, 137A, and 137B is selected and set, based on the random number value MR4 extracted in step S270, the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation that does not execute the sudden effect is performed. The pattern type CA3-4 and any one of the fluctuation pattern type CA4-1 to fluctuation pattern type CA4-3 for executing the sudden effect can be determined. Thus, in this embodiment, when the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the presence or absence of the sudden effect is determined when the change pattern type is determined in step S271. As another example, the big hit fluctuation shown in FIGS. 15 (A) and 15 (B), FIGS. 16 (A) and (B), FIGS. 17 (A), (B), (D) and (E) in step S262. When any one of the pattern type determination tables 135A, 135B, 135D, 135E, 136A, 136B, 137A, and 137B is selected and set, the “normal reach (sudden effect) is selected based on the random value MR4 extracted in step S270. “None / no re-drawing)” variation pattern type CA3-1, “Super Reach (no sudden production / no re-drawing)” variation pattern type CA 3-2, “Normal reach (no sudden production / no re-drawing)” The variation pattern type CA3-3, the variation pattern type CA3-4 of “super reach (no sudden production / re-draw)”, etc. That. Thus, in this embodiment, when the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” and the sudden effect is not executed, when the change pattern type is determined in step S271, the reach effect of either normal reach or super reach is selected. Determination of whether to execute, determination of presence / absence of re-lottery effect, etc. are performed. Furthermore, as another example, when any one of the reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C is selected and set in step S268, it is extracted in step S270. Based on the random number MR4 or the like, any of the variation pattern type CA2-1 of “normal reach”, the variation pattern type CA2-2 of “superreach α”, and the variation pattern type CA2-3 of “superreach β” It is decided. Thus, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”, when determining the variation pattern type in step S271, normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are selected. Of these, it is determined which reach production is to be executed.

  Here, in the processes of steps S270 and S271, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol based on the establishment of the first start condition. Whether to determine the type, or to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Regardless, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S270 and S271, regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach display state in step S266, numerical data indicating the common random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is used to perform the processing by a common processing module. The variation pattern type can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S271, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S271 in this way, as a use table for determining the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type, FIGS. ) Shown in FIG. 19, FIG. 19, FIG. 20 (A) and FIG. 20 (B) are selected from a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables. Is set (step S272). Subsequently, a random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S273). Then, based on the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S273, the variation pattern determination table set in step S272 is referred to determine which one of the plurality of types of variation patterns is selected. This is performed (step S274). As an example, when one of the variation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-4 is determined in step S271, the big hit variation pattern determination table 139A shown in FIG. 19 is selected and set in step S272. If the variation pattern type CA3-2 is “super reach (no sudden effect / no redrawing)”, the variation pattern PA5-1 to variation pattern PA5-3 and variation pattern PA6-1 to variation pattern PA6-5 are displayed. Any one is selected based on the random value MR5 in step S274. If the variation pattern type CA3-4 is “super reach (no sudden production / re-draw)”, the variation pattern PA8-1 to variation pattern PA8-3 and variation pattern PA9-1 to variation pattern PA9-5 are included. Any one is selected based on the random value MR5 in step S274. Thus, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern type CA3-2 or the variation pattern type CA3-4 is determined, when the variation pattern is determined in step S274, any one of the super reach α and the super reach β is determined. The determination of whether to execute the reach effect, the determination of the presence / absence of the specific effect as the “pseudo-run”, the determination of the number of times of the pseudo-run when executing the specific effect of the “pseudo-run”, and the like are performed.

  Here, in the processing of steps S273 and S274, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A when the first start condition is satisfied. Whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Instead, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S273 and S274, the numerical value data indicating the common random number MR5 used for determining the variation pattern is used to change by the common processing module regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach display state in step S266. The pattern can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S274, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern in step S274, a special symbol variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern determination result is set (step S275). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is set so as to start the variable display of the special symbol (step S276). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After executing the process of step S276, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the variable symbol variable display start are performed (step S277). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by a transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 Stored in the designated buffer area. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. When the setting in step S277 is performed, every time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 40 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. The first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variable display result notification command are sequentially transmitted.

  Following the setting in step S277, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S278), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 45, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. Should be stored in. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S295). For example, in step S295, a process for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-shortage flag to turn it off, a process for clearing a special-figure variation number counter for counting the number of times the special figure game is executed in the probability variation state and the time-shortage state, etc. It only has to be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether or not the probability variation state or the time reduction state is to be ended (step S297). For example, in the process of step S297, when the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting one or adding one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated special figure variation count value matches a predetermined special gaming state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability variation state or the time reduction state may be terminated by clearing the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag, etc., and controlled to the normal state. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability change flag or the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S297 may be ended. Note that the end determination based on the special figure fluctuation count count value is performed only when the time reduction flag is on and is in the time reduction state. Control may be continued until the result is “big hit”. Alternatively, for example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and referring to a probability change state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like. Further, it may be determined whether or not to end the probability variation state. After executing the process of step S297, the special symbol process flag value is updated to “0”, and then the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 46, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot ending presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-opening of the special winning opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 41, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and depending on whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. What is necessary is just to determine whether the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S312). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type buffer value read in step S312 is “0” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (step S313). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is “0” (step S313; Yes), the setting for starting the control to the short time state is performed (step S314). As an example, in the process of step S314, the time reduction flag is set to the on state, and the count initial value (for example, “100”) determined in advance corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. May be set in the special figure fluctuation counter.

  When the big hit type buffer value is other than “0” in step S313 (step S313; No), setting for starting control to the probability variation state is performed (step S315). As an example, in the process of step S315, the probability variation flag is set to the on state, and a predetermined count initial value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the probability variation state is set as the number of special diagram fluctuations. What is necessary is just to set to a counter. Note that when the control for changing the probability change state is continued until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the special figure fluctuation number counter need not be set.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S314 and S315, the special process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S316), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 47 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, a random number update process is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating a random value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 among various random values used for effect control is displayed by software. Update. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined, set according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  In the command analysis processing in step S405, when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the reserved memory display for updating the reserved memory display in the start winning memory display unit 5H of the image display device 5 is received. An update process may be executed. In this reserved memory display update process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the reserved memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, checking the effect control command stored in the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is reception. At this time, if no pending storage number notification command is received, the pending storage display update process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a pending storage number notification command has been received, it is determined whether a decrease in the pending storage number is designated or an increase is designated by the pending storage number notification command. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control only needs to be able to specify the number of reserved memories based on the value of the variable display hold counter (variable display hold count value) provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. In this case, the pending storage count notified by the pending storage count notification command is compared with the variable display pending count value, and if the notified pending storage count is larger, it is determined that the increase in the pending storage count is designated. On the other hand, if the notified number of reserved memories is smaller, it may be determined that a decrease in the number of reserved memories is designated.

  Then, when a decrease in the number of reserved memories is designated, a hold display decrease update setting for updating the reserved memory display in the start winning memory display unit 5H is performed in response to the decrease in the number of reserved memories. In this hold display reduction update setting, for example, one of the display parts changed to the opaque color display in the start winning memory display unit 5H (for example, the leftmost display part of the display parts that are in the opaque color) The display setting for moving the display in each display part to the next one by one is performed. At this time, the display setting for returning one of the display parts that have been changed to the predetermined opaque color display (for example, the rightmost display part of the display parts that have become opaque color) to the transparent color display is also performed. Done. Further, in the hold display reduction update setting, the variable display hold count value may be updated by 1. After performing such a hold display reduction update setting, the hold storage display update process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an increase in the number of reserved memories is designated, it is determined whether or not any of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command has been received. To do. Here, it is determined whether or not the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command has been received in the command analysis processing in step S405, and any of the start opening prize designation commands is received. When it is determined that there is a command, a command reception flag corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command may be set to an on state. As an example, when the first start opening prize designation command is received, the first start opening prize designation command reception flag is set to ON, while when the second start opening prize designation command is received, the second start opening prize designation command is set. Sets the specified command reception flag to the on state. In this case, if either the first start opening prize designation command reception flag or the second start opening prize designation command reception flag is on, it may be determined that the start opening prize designation command has been received.

  When it is determined that the start opening prize designation command has not been received, the start opening prize designation for updating the hold memory display in the starting prize storage display section 5H corresponding to the absence of the starting opening prize designation is not made. Display update settings are made. In the display update setting when the start opening prize is not specified, for example, blue display (display color corresponding to establishment of the first start condition) or red display (display corresponding to establishment of the second start condition) on the start prize storage display unit 5H. Display setting for changing all of the display parts that are colored) to gray display, and display for changing one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning memory display unit 5H to gray display Settings are made. After performing such a display update setting when no start opening winning designation is made, the on-hold storage display update process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the start opening prize designation command has been received, the received start opening prize designation command is determined depending on, for example, whether or not the first start opening prize designation command reception flag is on. It is determined whether or not it is a first start opening winning designation command. At this time, if it is determined that the command is the first start opening prize designation command, the first hold display for updating the hold memory display in the start prize memory display unit 5H corresponding to the increase in the first hold memory number. An incremental update setting is made. In this first hold display increase update setting, for example, the first start by the game ball having entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening. Display setting for changing to blue display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such first hold display increase update setting, the hold storage display update process ends. If it is determined that the command is the second start opening prize designation command, the second hold for updating the hold memory display in the start prize memory display area 5H corresponding to the increase in the second hold memory number. Display increase update setting is performed. In the second hold display increase / update setting, for example, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is used for the second start due to the game ball entering the second start winning opening. Display setting for changing to red display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such second hold display increase update setting, the hold storage display update process ends.

  In this way, before receiving the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11, either the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command serving as the starting opening winning designation command is normally performed. 1st hold display increase update setting and 2nd hold display increase update setting are performed. At this time, in the start winning memory display unit 5H, the first reserved memory number that is the number of stored data in the first special figure storage unit 151A based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition are established. The second reserved memory number that is the stored number of the hold data in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  On the other hand, the reserved memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 notifies the increase of the reserved memory count, and becomes the start slot winning designation command before receiving the reserved memory count notification command. When neither a winning designation command nor a second starting opening winning designation command is received, display update setting is performed when no starting opening winning designation is specified. At this time, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start winning storage display unit 5H is changed to a predetermined display mode. For example, by setting the display mode of the hold memory display to gray, the total hold memory number can be specified, but the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number can be displayed so that they cannot be specified. After that, when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, if the start opening winning designation command is normally received, the first hold display increase update setting and the second hold display increase update setting are set. By performing either one, it is possible to add a new display corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command while maintaining the display mode in the display portion which is displayed in gray. As an example, when the reserved memory number notification command is received after the first start opening winning designation command is normally received, the first hold display increase update setting is performed, thereby winning the first start winning opening A blue display corresponding to is added.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the following processes in steps S160 to S165 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example. Run.

  The variation start waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variation start waiting process is provided in the image display device 5 depending on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in each of the displayed “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol displays 5L, 5C, and 5R and variable display of color symbols in the color symbol display area This includes processing to make a decision. At this time, if it is determined to start variable display, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In response to, in order to perform various production operations including variable display of decorative symbols and color symbols, final decorative symbols, temporary stop symbols, and advance notices depending on fluctuation patterns and variable display results, etc. A process for determining a pattern or the like is included. The decorative symbol variation setting process includes a process for determining the presence / absence of the mission and the contents when the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern for executing the mission start effect. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, a symbol variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, a mission start effect control pattern, and the like are set based on these determination results. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation process, the symbol variation control pattern, the notice effect control pattern, the mission start effect, corresponding to the value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 (effect control process timer value). A process for reading various control data from a control pattern or the like and performing various effect controls during variable display of decorative symbols is included. As an example, when the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 is set in the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161, the I / O 125 is used when the effect operation that becomes the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 reads an operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 via a predetermined input port included, and determines whether or not the operation detection signal is turned on within the operation valid period. Here, in the case where an item for executing a sudden effect such as the variation pattern PT1-2 or the variation pattern PT4-2 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the timing at which the operation detection signal is turned on within the operation valid period. Switch the production operation to the sudden production. On the other hand, when a variation pattern that does not execute the sudden effect is designated, the notification effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 is controlled as the notification effect control when the operation detection signal is turned on within the operation effective period. By switching to the pattern CYP1-1-2, etc., the production operation is switched to the dialogue YN1-1. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. When the final decorative design is displayed in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. In addition, even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “4” when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. Is done. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound effect sound signal is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on by outputting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as turning off / off / flashing. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” in response to, for example, receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or a voice control board For example, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LEDs are turned on / off / flashing by outputting electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a process for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is included. Further, in the ending effect process, setting for changing the effect mode may be performed in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability changing state or the short time state. For example, when the 15-round big hit state ends after the variable display result is “big hit” for the “normal” big hit type, the selection setting of the symbol variation control pattern table 168A is changed so that the effect mode is reduced to a short time. By doing so, the display mode of the background image and the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed. In addition, the selection setting of the symbol variation control pattern table 168A is changed so as to enter the effect mode during the probability change when the 15-round big hit state is ended after the variable display result becomes the “big hit” in the “big change” big hit type. By doing so, the display mode of the background image and the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed. Further, when the two-round big hit state is terminated after the variable display result is “big hit” with the “big hit” big hit type, the selection setting of the symbol variation control pattern table 168A is changed so that the sudden hit mode is set. Thus, the display mode of the background image and the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is a designation for executing the mission start effect from the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command (step S501). As an example, in the process of step S501, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PA1-5, variation pattern PA6-5, variation pattern PA9-5, variation pattern PT2-1, variation pattern PT2-4. If the pattern is either the variation pattern PT5-1 or the variation pattern PT5-4, it is determined that the mission start effect is designated.

  If the mission start effect is specified in step S501 (step S501; Yes), the presence or absence of the mission and the content are determined (step S502). As an example, in the process of step S502, it is determined whether or not the effect mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is already the mission mode. At this time, if it is already in the mission mode, it may be determined that there is no mission and the notification content of the mission is not changed or duplicated. Alternatively, even when already in the mission mode, another mission may be notified to determine to overlap the notification of the mission. Alternatively, when already in the mission mode, it may be determined to change to a mission different from the already-reported mission and change the notification content of the mission. If it is determined that there is no mission, the process of step S502 is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a mission, the content of the mission to be notified is determined. At this time, according to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, it may be determined to vary the content of the mission to be notified. For example, when the variable display result is the variation pattern PA1-5 that is “losing”, or among the variation patterns that the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern PT2-1 and the variation pattern PT2- 4. If any of the variation pattern PT5-1 and the variation pattern PT5-4 is selected, any one of the mission contents corresponding to all the mission start effect control patterns shown in FIG. 37 may be selected. Good. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a mission determination random value from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and refers to the mission determination table stored in the ROM 121 or the like in advance. By doing so, the content of the mission can be determined.

  In addition, when the variable display result is one of the change patterns PA6-5 and PA9-5 in which the sudden effect is not executed among the change patterns in which the variable display result is “big hit”, the change display result is notified by the variable display result notification command. Depending on the jackpot type, different mission contents may be determined. For example, when the notified jackpot type is “normal”, any of the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” as the normal symbols is displayed. One of the missions including the reach display state according to the design is selected. On the other hand, when the notified jackpot type is “probable change”, any one of the mission contents corresponding to all the mission start effect control patterns may be selected.

  If the mission start effect is not specified in step S501 (step S501; No), or after executing the process of step S502, the final stop symbol is determined (step S503). As an example, in the process of step S503, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a non-reach loss variation pattern. At this time, if the non-reach loss variation pattern is designated, it is further determined whether or not the variation pattern PA1-5 is for executing the mission start effect.

  If the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern PA1-5, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 23A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 23B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 23C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, a random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  When the variation pattern PA1-5 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 23D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1 that become one of the mission start chance MC1 to MC8 The combination of −5 and FZ1-6 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Thus, if it is a non-reach loss variation pattern other than the variation pattern PA1-5, referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left and right outcome determination table 161, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1- 3 is determined so that the combination of the confirmed decorative pattern does not become the reach combination or the big hit combination, and even if the combination of the decorative designs other than the reach combination or the big hit combination is used, the pseudo continuous pattern shown in FIG. Chance items GC1 to GC8, mission start chance items MC1 to MC8 shown in FIG. 3B, sudden chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. It will never be.

  As another example, in the process of step S503, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a reach / loss variation pattern. At this time, if the reach loss variation pattern is designated, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 26A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 26B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the decorative symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- 3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  Thus, when the reach loss variation pattern is designated, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” other than the “middle” ornament symbol display portion 5C from which the ornament symbol is finally derived and displayed. The right and left final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are derived and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R are determined. After that, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the ornament symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2- in the “medium” ornament symbol display portion 5C from which the ornament symbol is finally derived and displayed. 1, the design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  As yet another example, in the process of step S503, whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is one of the variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4 that are the sudden hit variation patterns, It is determined whether the variation pattern is other than the pattern. At this time, if the sudden hit hit variation pattern is designated, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 27C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 are obtained. 2, The combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. When a sudden hit variation pattern is specified, a decorative pattern that is one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 or a decorative pattern that is another non-reach loss combination may be determined as a final decorative pattern. Also good. In addition, when a sudden big hit variation pattern is designated, a decorative design that is a reach-losing combination may be determined as a confirmed decorative design.

  When a variation pattern other than the sudden hit big hit variation pattern is specified, depending on the big hit type notified by the variable display result notification command, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes a normal big hit combination, or the fixed decorative symbol that becomes a probable big hit combination Is determined. At this time, when the notified jackpot type is “normal”, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 27A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. On the other hand, when the notified jackpot type is “probability change”, it is determined whether to use the normal jackpot combination or the probability change jackpot combination depending on whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect. Also good. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed after determining whether the normal big hit combination or the probability variation big hit combination. In this case, when the notified jackpot type is “probable change” and the determined decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is determined, it may be determined to execute the jackpot promotion effect. When determining the final decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination, the final decorative symbol may be determined using the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. . When determining the definite decorative symbol for the probable big hit combination, the final stop symbol determining table 163B shown in FIG. 27B is selected and set as the use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Further, in the process of step S503, when the production mode is the mission mode, the confirmed decorative pattern may be determined by a procedure different from that in the production mode other than the mission mode. As an example, when the production mode is the mission mode and the reach loss variation pattern is specified, a definite decorative design is displayed so that a decorative design different from the decorative design notified as a mission is derived and displayed in the reach display state. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of. For example, when it is informed as a mission that the reach display state is indicated by the decorative symbol indicating the number “1”, the decorative symbols other than the decorative symbol indicating the number “1” are derived and displayed in the reach display state. Next, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols is determined. In this case, it is determined whether or not the decorative symbols to be the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A match the decorative symbols notified as the mission. If they match, the decorative symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 may be changed by adding 1 or subtracting 1 to the symbol number of the determined decorative symbol.

  As another example, when the production mode is the mission mode, if the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” and the variable display result is “hit” without executing the sudden production, the mission is notified. The combination of the confirmed decorative symbols may be determined so that the same decorative symbol as the existing decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state. Alternatively, the percentage of the decorative symbols that are notified as missions are derived and displayed in the reach display state is higher than the ratio that the decorative symbols that are notified as missions are derived and displayed in the reach display state. Alternatively, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols may be determined using a determination table in which random numbers are assigned to the decorative symbols. Note that when it is reported as a mission that any of the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” will be displayed and displayed in the reach display state. When the type is “normal” and the variable display result is “big hit”, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols is selected so that the decorative symbols different from the decorative symbols reported as missions are derived and displayed in the reach display state. You may decide.

  After executing the process of step S503, a temporary stop symbol is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern for executing a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. If a variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-run” specific effect is specified, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display sections 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in the “pseudo-run” specific effect. The combination of decorative symbols to be displayed in a temporary stop is determined for all of the above. At this time, the number of quasi-continuous re-variations corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is set in the variable M. For example, when the variation pattern PA1-4 shown in FIG. For example, in the variation pattern PT1-4, variation pattern PT2-5, variation pattern PT3-3, and the like shown in FIG. 12A (when there is no re-lottery effect), the decoration that becomes one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8. When the combination of symbols is stopped (temporarily stopped), the display is switched to the sudden effect. Therefore, when these variation patterns are specified, the value of the variable M is not the number of re-variations of the pseudo-groups, but the number of times that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of the “pseudo-series” (pseudo-group temporary stop The number of display times) may be set.

  After setting the variable M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 164A shown in FIG. 28A is selected as the use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 164A serving as a usage table based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3-1, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ2 that is one of the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 are determined. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable M is “1”. At this time, if the value of the variable M is “1”, the determination of the decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily is completed.

  When the value of the variable M is other than “1”, the temporary stop symbol determination table 164B shown in FIG. 28B is selected as a use table after updating the value of the variable M so that 1 is subtracted. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 164B serving as a use table based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ3 that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3 are determined. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable M is “1”. At this time, if the value of the variable M is “1”, the determination of the decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily is completed.

  Further, when the value of the variable M is other than “1”, the variable M is updated so that the value of the variable M is decremented by 1, and then the temporary stop symbol determination table 164C shown in FIG. 28C is selected as the use table. To do. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 164C serving as a use table based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4 that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 are determined. At this time, the value of the variable M is always “1”, and the determination of the decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily is completed.

  As another example, in the process of step S504, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern for executing the re-lottery effect. If the variation pattern for executing the re-lottery effect is designated, the decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is determined. At this time, for example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 shown in FIG. 30 is selected as the use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number SR2 for determining a temporary stop symbol before re-lottery is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 that is a use table based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7 that are usually the big hit combinations are used. -3 combinations are determined. It should be noted that the decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottering effect is executed may be determined based on the final decorative pattern that is the final stop symbol determined in step S503. . In this case, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol determined in the process of step S503 is a normal jackpot combination, the decorative symbol identical to the confirmed decorative symbol is determined as a decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily before executing the re-lottery effect. do it. In addition, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol determined in the process of step S503 is a probable big hit combination, a decorative symbol to be displayed for temporary stop may be determined from arbitrary normal symbols. A normal symbol whose number is different by “1” may be determined as a decorative symbol for temporary stop display.

  As yet another example, in the process of step S504, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a sudden big hit variation pattern, even if the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is not executed, the operation is switched to the sudden effect. It is determined whether or not the pattern is a variation pattern that may temporarily display the decorative symbol before. For example, when any of the variation patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 shown in FIG. 12A is designated, the “left” decorative pattern is displayed before the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect. A decorative design may be derived and displayed on the display unit 5L. When the variation pattern PT2-1 shown in FIG. 12 (A) is designated, when executing the mission start effect, a decorative design that becomes one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 may be derived and displayed. . When any of the variation pattern PT2-2, variation pattern PT2-6, variation pattern PT3-2, variation pattern PT3-5, variation pattern PT3-6 shown in FIG. Before the effect switching timing to be switched, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. When the variation pattern PT1-5 shown in FIG. 12 (A) is specified, a decorative pattern that becomes one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 may be derived and displayed when the surprise mode start effect is executed. . In such a case, in step S504, it is determined that a variation pattern that may temporarily display a decorative symbol is designated before switching to a stunning effect. Then, the decorative design to be temporarily stopped is determined before switching to the sudden effect. At this time, the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped may be determined regardless of the final stop symbol determined in step S503. Or you may make it determine a temporary stop symbol from the decoration symbols previously matched with the final stop symbol. As an example, in the case where the final stop symbol is a definitive ornament symbol combination consisting of ornament symbols indicating the number “7”, the ornament symbol indicating the number “7” on the “left” ornament symbol display portion 5L. Is determined to be temporarily stopped, or the decorative symbols indicating the number “7” are derived and displayed in the reach display state in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. do it. As another example, in the case where the final stop symbol is a definitive ornament symbol combination consisting of ornament symbols indicating the number “7”, the number “7” is indicated on the “left” ornament symbol display portion 5L. The ratio determined to display the decorative symbols temporarily may be higher than the ratio determined to display the decorative symbols other than the number “7” temporarily.

  After executing the process of step S504, a notice setting process is executed (step S505). FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice setting process executed in step S505 of FIG. In the notice setting process, first, the notice pattern type determination table 166 shown in FIG. 31 is selected and set as a use table (step S521). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number value SR4 for determining the notice pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S522). Then, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 166 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR4 extracted in step S522, there is no notice effect according to the variation pattern, or the notice pattern type CY1 to the notice pattern type. Any one of CY3 is determined (step S523). At this time, if it is determined that there is no notice effect (step S524; Yes), the notice setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S523 that one of the notification pattern types CY1 to CY3 (step S524; No), the notification pattern determination table 167A shown in FIG. 33, one of the notice pattern determination table 167B shown in FIG. 33 and the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 34 is selected and set as a use table (step S525). That is, when the notice pattern type CY1 is determined in step S523, the notice pattern decision table 167A is set, and when the notice pattern type CY2 is decided, the notice pattern decision table 167B is set, and the notice pattern type CY3 is set. If determined, the notice pattern determination table 167C is set. After that, for example, a random value corresponding to the notice pattern type is selected from random numbers SR5-1 to SR5-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. The numerical data shown is extracted (step S526). That is, when the notice pattern type CY1 is determined in step S523, numerical data indicating the first notice pattern determination random value SR5-1 is extracted, and when the notice pattern type CY2 is determined, the second value is extracted. Numerical data indicating the random number value SR5-2 for determining the notice pattern is extracted, and when the notice pattern type CY3 is determined, the random value SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern is extracted.

  After the numerical data indicating the random value is extracted in step S526, a plurality of notice patterns are generated according to the variation pattern by referring to the use table set in step S525 based on the numerical data indicating the random value. The type is determined (step S527). When the notice pattern is determined in this way, the notice setting process ends.

  After the notice setting process is executed in step S505 shown in FIG. 49, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S506). For example, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 168A shown in FIG. Select or set as the usage pattern. At this time, when a plurality of types of symbol variation control pattern tables 168A are prepared in accordance with a plurality of performance modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1, they are stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 168A corresponding to the current performance mode. Any one of the symbol variation control patterns may be selected as a usage pattern. Thereby, even if it is the same fluctuation pattern, for example, the production mode in the pachinko machine 1 is a plurality of production modes such as a normal production mode, a production mode during probability change, a production mode during a short time, a mission mode, and a surprise mode. The display mode of the background image, the display mode of the decorative pattern, and the like can be made different depending on which of these is.

  Further, in the process of step S506, among the plurality of types of the notice effect control patterns stored in the notice effect control pattern table 168B shown in FIG. 36 corresponding to the notice pattern determined in step S527 of FIG. Select one of them as the usage pattern and set it. In addition, in the process of step S506, among the plural types of mission start effect control patterns stored in the mission start effect control pattern table 168C shown in FIG. 37 corresponding to the contents of the mission determined in step S502. , Select one as the usage pattern and set it.

  Following the processing in step S506, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 corresponding to the effect control process timer setting value indicated in the symbol variation control pattern set in step S506. Is set (step S507). Then, for example, by supplying a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the design variation control pattern to the display control unit 123, the “left”, “middle”, “right” provided in the image display device 5 are provided. Is set to start the variation of various symbols in the image display device 5 such as starting variable display of the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R (step S508). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation processing (step S509), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1), and then updates the updated effect control process timer value to a predetermined variable display time elapsed determination value. It is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed by comparing with (for example, “0”) (step S541).

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S541 (step S541; Yes), the decorative symbol stop command reception waiting time is set by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer (step S541). S542). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to “3” which is a value corresponding to the process at the end of the decorative symbol variation (step S543), the process during the decorative symbol variation is terminated.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S541 (step S541; No), for example, based on the effect control process timer value, the elapsed time since the start of variable display of the decorative design (or the confirmed decorative design is displayed). The effect control is set according to the remaining time until the stop display is performed (step S544). As an example, in the process of step S544, a timer determination value indicated by various effect control patterns such as a symbol variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and a mission start effect control pattern is compared with an effect control process timer value. Thus, it is determined whether or not it matches any one of the timer determination values. If any timer determination value is matched, various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value is read. At this time, when the display control data is read, the display control command created according to the display control data is transmitted to the display control unit 123, and when the voice control data is read, the voice The sound effect signal created according to the control data is transmitted to the sound control board 13, and when the lamp control data is read, the illumination signal created according to the lamp control data is transmitted to the lamp control board 14. You can do it. Thus, after effect control is set in step S544, the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation end process executed in step S163 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation end process, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1 subtraction, for example), and then determines whether the updated effect control process timer value has passed a predetermined command waiting time. It is determined whether or not the decorative symbol stop command reception waiting time has elapsed by comparing with a value (eg, “0”) (step S551).

  If the decorative symbol stop command reception waiting time has not elapsed in step S551 (step S551; No), it is determined whether or not a decorative symbol stop command has been received (step S552). At this time, if no decorative symbol stop command is received (step S552; No), the decorative symbol variation end process is terminated. On the other hand, if a decorative symbol stop command is received (step S552; Yes), for example, a “left” provided in the image display device 5 is provided by supplying a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123. , “Middle” and “Right” decorative symbols are displayed on all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and settings are made to confirm the variable display result of the decorative symbols (step S553).

  Following the processing of step S553, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a “big hit” based on, for example, a variable display result notification command already transmitted from the main board 11 (step S554). At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” (step S554; Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the mission mode (step S555). Here, the effect mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified by, for example, the value of the effect mode buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 (effect mode buffer value). If the mission mode is set in step S555 (step S555; Yes), for example, the setting for ending the mission mode is performed by clearing the effect mode buffer (step S556). If it is not the mission mode in step S555, it is determined whether or not the effect mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the suddenness mode (step S557).

  If the effect mode is the insidious mode in step S557 (step S557; Yes), for example, by clearing the effect mode buffer, settings are made to end the insidious mode (step S558). When the production mode is not the suddenness mode in step S557 (step S557; No), or after performing any of the processing of steps S556 and S558, a predetermined timer initial value is set in the production control process timer. Thus, the waiting start designation command reception waiting time is set (step S559). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during jackpot control (step S560), and then the decorative symbol variation end process is ended.

  If the variable display result is “losing” instead of “big hit” in step S554 (step S554; No), whether or not the mission mode is started depending on whether or not the mission start effect has been executed. Is determined (step S561). At this time, if the mission mode is started (step S561; Yes), for example, the setting for starting the mission mode is performed by updating the effect mode buffer value (step S562). If the mission mode is not started in step S561 (step S561; No), it is determined whether or not the mission mode is ended (step S563). Here, when the production mode is the mission mode, for example, by a mission mode timer provided in the production control timer setting unit 192, an elapsed time after the mission mode is started, or until the mission mode is ended. The remaining time may be measured. In this case, in the process of step S563, the value of the mission mode timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and then the updated timer value is compared with the mission end determination value (for example, “0”) corresponding to the mission content and the like. By doing so, it may be determined whether or not the time limit in the notified mission has elapsed.

  When the mission mode ends in step S563 (step S563; Yes), for example, the setting for ending the mission mode is performed by clearing the effect mode buffer (step S564). If the mission mode does not end in step S563 (step S563; No), or after performing any of the processing in steps S562 and S564, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” (step S565), the decorative symbol variation end process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the effect control board 12, in response to receiving the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, the effect control is performed based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. The CPU 120 supplies a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123 in step S508 in FIG. 49 or step S544 in FIG. As a result, variable display of the decorative symbols is performed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5. Each variation pattern is assigned a time schedule that indicates how the decorative symbol is changed according to the content of the effect. The variable display of the decorative symbol is for effect control according to the selected time schedule. It is executed by the cooperation of the CPU 120 and the display control unit 123. This time schedule may be determined in advance by, for example, effect display control data in the symbol variation control pattern stored corresponding to each variation pattern in the symbol variation control pattern table 168A shown in FIG.

  As an example, in the variation pattern PA1-1, as shown in FIG. 53A, the variation of the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R ( All symbols change), left symbol deceleration stop, right symbol deceleration stop, middle symbol deceleration stop. Here, the “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L (change display, temporary stop display, complete stop display, etc.), and “middle symbol” is a “middle” ornament. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R.

  That is, when the first start condition or the second start condition for starting variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is satisfied, the first variation start command or the second variation start is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A variation pattern designation command and the like are transmitted together with the command (step S277 in FIG. 44). In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 supplies a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the time schedule shown in FIG. 53A in response to the first change start command or the second change start command. . At this time, in response to the designation of the variation pattern PA1-1 by the variation pattern designation command, the final decorative symbol that is the non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol by the process of step S503 shown in FIG. .

  As a result, first, the decorative display of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, and the fluctuation speed is accelerated. The design is changed at a constant speed (constant speed). After that, the display process of the left symbol deceleration stop and the right symbol deceleration stop is sequentially executed. At this time, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the non-reach display state in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R corresponding to the confirmed decorative symbols determined in step S503 of FIG. . Thereafter, a display process of decelerating and stopping the middle symbol is executed without executing the reach effect, and a fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is derived and displayed. On the main board 11, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 measures the elapsed time from the start point of variable display using a variable display timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, and the variation pattern The decorative symbol stop command may be transmitted when 12000 milliseconds [ms], which is a variable display time corresponding to PA1-1, has elapsed. Alternatively, when the decorative board stop command is not transmitted from the main board 11, the elapsed time from the start point of the variable display is measured on the effect control board 12, and the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-1 has passed. In addition, the display of the confirmed decorative design may be confirmed. In this way, the effect control board 12 temporarily stops the non-reach combination confirmed symbol derived and displayed by, for example, deceleration of the middle symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 500 milliseconds [ms]) until the variable display time elapses. In response to receiving the decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 or the fact that the elapsed time measured on the side of the presentation control board 12 has reached the variable display time, for example, for presentation control As the CPU 120 supplies a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123, the final stop symbols are confirmed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display units 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display the decoration pattern completely stopped (confirm).

  FIG. 53 (B) shows a specific example of the time schedule assigned to the variation pattern PT1-1 for executing the sudden effect during all symbol variations. In this case, in response to the fact that the fluctuation pattern PT1-1 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, etc., the final decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination is determined as the final stop symbol by the process of step S503 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 53 (B), after all symbols fluctuate and the left symbol decelerates and stops, at the timing when 4000 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed from the start of all symbols fluctuate, The similar effect operation is switched to an unexpected effect different from the effect operation by the variation pattern PA1-1, and the unexpected effect is executed for 4000 milliseconds [ms]. Then, for example, during the execution of the sudden effect, a finalized symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol, and when the sudden effect is finished, the finalized symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed so that the player can recognize it. . For example, when 3500 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed since the start of the sudden effect, a predetermined decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, and a predetermined time (for example, 500 milliseconds [ms]) until the sudden effect ends. It is only necessary to temporarily stop and display the determined decorative symbols that are derived and displayed.

  FIGS. 55A to 55F show an example of the effect operation by the variation pattern PT1-1. In the variation pattern PT1-1, first, all symbol variations as shown in FIG. 55A are started, and then the left symbol as shown in FIG. 55B is decelerated and stopped. Subsequently, at the timing when 4000 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed since the start of all symbol fluctuations, the sudden effect as shown in FIGS. 55 (C) to (F) is switched. Then, when the sudden effect as shown in FIG. 55 (F) is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (B), in the variation pattern PT1-1 included in the sudden big hit variation pattern, the variable display time of the decorative symbol is shorter than the variation pattern PA1-1 included in the non-reach loss variation pattern. ing. In the variation pattern PT1-1, when a predetermined time such as 4000 milliseconds [ms] has elapsed since the start of all symbol variations, it becomes the effect switching timing, and suddenly starts from the effect operation similar to the variation pattern PA1-1. Switching to production is performed. Then, when the sudden effect is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 53C shows a specific example of the time schedule assigned to the variation pattern PT4-1 in which the re-lottery effect is executed in addition to the effect operation in the variation pattern PT1-1. In the example shown in FIG. 53 (C), as with the variation pattern PT1-1, after all symbols variation and the left symbol have been decelerated to a stop, the sudden effect is switched to. This is a state in which the fixed decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, a re-lottery effect is executed for 10,000 milliseconds [ms], and during the execution of the re-lottery effect, if the re-lottery effect is a fluctuating promotion failure effect, a definite decorative combination that is normally a big hit combination is derived and displayed. . On the other hand, if the re-lottery effect is a changing promotion success effect, a definite decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination is derived and displayed. For example, when 9500 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed since the start of the re-lottery effect, a definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination that will be the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, and a predetermined time (for example, until the re-lottery effect ends) For example, it is only necessary to temporarily stop and display the determined decorative symbol that has been derived and displayed over 500 mm [ms]).

  In step S523 of FIG. 50, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 166 as shown in FIG. 31, there is no notice effect or the notice pattern type CY1 to notice pattern type CY3 corresponding to the variation pattern PT1-1. Any of these may be determined. As an example, when the notification pattern type CY1 is determined, in step S527 of FIG. 50, the notification pattern determination table 167A as shown in FIG. One of the pattern YP1-1 and the notice pattern YP1-2 is determined. Here, when the notice pattern YP1-1 or the notice pattern YP1-2 is determined, the button operation promotion effect is performed based on the notice effect control pattern determined in step S506 shown in FIG. When the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period during the operation effective period, the rendering operation that becomes the line YN1-1 or the line YN1-2 is executed. In the variation pattern PT1-1, it is predetermined that the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect is 4000 milliseconds [ms] from the start of all symbol variations, and the operation button 30 is within the operation effective period. At the timing when the operation is performed, switching to the sudden effect is not performed.

  As another example, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), a time schedule of all symbol variation, left symbol deceleration stop, right symbol deceleration stop, middle symbol deceleration stop is assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1. It has been. The progression order in the variable display of decorative symbols by such a variation pattern PA4-1 is the same as that of the variation pattern PA1-1 described above, but the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach display state, and the variable display result is “ Corresponding to “big hit” or the like, it is only necessary that the execution time of each display process and the rendering operation other than the variable display of the decorative symbols are different. In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 supplies a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the time schedule shown in FIG. 54A in response to the first change start command or the second change start command. . At this time, corresponding to the fact that the variation pattern PA4-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, etc., the jackpot combination is performed by the process of step S503 shown in FIG. The final decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54 (A), when the display processing of all symbol variation, left symbol deceleration stop, and right symbol deceleration stop is executed in sequence, for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display units When the same decorative symbols are aligned and displayed temporarily at 5L, 5R, etc., the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach display state (reach establishment). After that, as a normal reach production corresponding to “Normal reach”, the middle symbol is decelerated and stopped for 15000 milliseconds [ms] in the “middle” ornament symbol display section 5C, and the final ornament symbol that is a jackpot combination is final. Derived and displayed as a stop symbol. At this time, it is only necessary to temporarily stop and display the definite decorative symbol that is the big hit combination derived and displayed by the deceleration stop of the middle symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 500 milliseconds [ms]) until the variable display time elapses.

  FIG. 54 (B) shows a specific example of a time schedule assigned to the variation pattern PT2-2 for executing the sudden effect during the reach effect that is the normal reach (during the change after the reach is established). In this case, in response to the fact that the variation pattern PT2-2 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the finalized symbol that is a big hit combination is determined as the final stop symbol by the process of step S503 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 54 (B), after all symbols change, left symbol deceleration stop and right symbol deceleration stop, the reach is established and the middle symbol deceleration stop is started until the middle symbol deceleration stop is started. An effect operation similar to PA4-1 is executed. On the other hand, in the variation pattern PT2-2, the effect switching timing is reached at the timing when 9000 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed since the start of deceleration stop of the middle symbol, and from the effect operation similar to the variation pattern PA4-1. Then, switching to the sudden effect is performed. Then, a sudden effect is executed for 4000 milliseconds [ms], and a finalized symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a final stop symbol during the execution of the sudden effect. As a result, when the sudden effect is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  FIGS. 55A and 55B and FIGS. 55G to 55L show an example of the effect operation by the variation pattern PT2-2. In the variation pattern PT2-2, first, all symbol variations as shown in FIG. 55 (A) are started, and then the left symbols as shown in FIG. 55 (B) are decelerated and stopped. Subsequently, after the right symbol is decelerated and stopped, the decorative symbol variable display state as shown in FIG. 55 (G) becomes the reach display state, for example, “reach!” Is reached. The effect operation to notify is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (H), the medium symbol fluctuating speed is reduced by the “medium” decorative symbol display section 5C, and the normal reach effect corresponding to “normal reach” is executed. After that, at the timing when 9000 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed since the start of the middle symbol deceleration fluctuation, the sudden effect as shown in FIGS. 55 (I) to (L) is switched. Then, when the sudden effect as shown in FIG. 55 (L) is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (B), the variable pattern PT2-2 included in the sudden jackpot variation pattern has a shorter variable symbol display time than the variation pattern PA4-1 included in the all-effects jackpot variation pattern. It has become. Then, in the variation pattern PT2-2, after all the symbol variations are started, an effect operation similar to the variation pattern PA4-1 is performed, and then when the effect switching timing is reached, the same effect as the variation pattern PA4-1 is performed. Switching from operation to sudden production is performed. Then, when the sudden effect is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 56A shows a specific example of a time schedule when the notice pattern YP1-1 is selected corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-1. In this case, based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the process of step S523 shown in FIG. 50 refers to the notice pattern type determination table 166 as shown in FIG. In accordance with the random value SR4 for determining the pattern type, the notice pattern type CY1 for executing the notice effect as the “line notice” is determined. Subsequently, in the process of step S527 shown in FIG. 50, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 167A as shown in FIG. 32, according to the numerical data indicating the random number value SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern, It is determined to select the notice pattern YP1-1. Based on these determination results, in the process of step S506 shown in FIG. 49, the symbol fluctuation control pattern CPA1-1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is read from the symbol fluctuation control pattern table 168A as shown in FIG. As well as being set, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-1 are read from the notice effect control pattern table 168B as shown in FIG. Set.

  In the example shown in FIG. 56 (A), the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is performed after all the symbol changes are started. Then, for example, the operation of the operation button 30 is detected at the timing when 5000 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed since the start of all symbol variations (button operation detection). In response to this button operation detection, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 switches from the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 to the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2, the effect operation of the serif YN1-1 is executed. Is done. As the decorative symbol display process, similar to the time schedule shown in FIG. 53A, display processes of all symbol variations, left symbol deceleration stop, and right symbol deceleration stop are sequentially executed. At this time, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the non-reach display state, and then the middle symbols are decelerated and stopped without executing the reach effect, and the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination are derived and displayed. If the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected after the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is performed and before the operation valid period ends, the effect operation of the line YN1-1 is not executed. Thus, as the decorative symbol display process, the same display process as that when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected is sequentially executed. The operation valid period is, for example, a period from the start of the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 to the end of deceleration stop of the left symbol in the variation pattern PA1-1 (7500 milliseconds [ms from the start of all symbol variations] ] Until the elapse of] or the like may be determined in advance. During the operation effective period, the decorative symbols are in the reach display state from the start of all symbol variations until the decorative symbols are derived and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. Any period may be set within the period before the derivation display. Further, when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period, the operation of the operation button 30 may not be detected as invalid after that even if the operation effective period has not elapsed. And the production | generation operation | movement of serif YN1-1 should just be set so that it may be performed until 8000 milliseconds [ms] passes, for example from a variable display start. In this case, for example, even if an operation of the operation button 30 is detected just before the end of the operation valid period, it is possible to execute the effect operation of the speech YN1-1 for a minimum of 500 milliseconds [ms]. The person can recognize the production contents of the dialogue YN1-1.

  FIGS. 57A to 57D show an example of the effect operation by the variation pattern PA1-1 and the notice pattern YP1-1. In the variation pattern PA1-1, first, all symbol variations as shown in FIG. 57 (A) are started. Thereafter, as the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 based on the notice pattern YP1-1, for example, an effect image including a character as shown in FIG. 57B or a message “Turn the button!” Is displayed on the image display device 5. Display. And when operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation valid period, switching from the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 to the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2 at the detection timing, etc. Thus, the effect operation of the dialogue YN1-1 as shown in FIG. 57 (C) is executed. After that, for example, the decorative symbol variable display by the variation pattern PA1-1 proceeds such that the left symbol as shown in FIG. 57 (D) is decelerated and stopped.

  FIG. 56B shows a specific example of the time schedule assigned to the variation pattern PT1-2 in which the sudden effect is executed after performing the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 similar to the case of the notice effect that becomes the “line notice”. A typical example is shown. In this case, based on the fact that the variation pattern PT1-2 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, in the process of step S523 shown in FIG. 50, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 166 as shown in FIG. Regardless of the random number SR4 for determining the notice pattern type, the notice pattern type CY1 is determined. That is, in the notice pattern type determination table 166, since all of the random value SR4 is assigned to the notice pattern type CY1 in association with the change pattern PT1-2, when the change pattern PT1-2 is designated, Regardless of the random value SR4 extracted in step S522 in FIG. 50, the notice pattern type CY1 is determined. Subsequently, in the process of step S527 shown in FIG. 50, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 167A as shown in FIG. 32, the notice pattern YP1 regardless of the random number SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern. It is decided to select -1. That is, in the notice pattern determination table 167A, since all the random values SR4 are assigned to the notice pattern YP1-1 in association with the change pattern PT1-2, when the change pattern PT1-2 is designated, Regardless of the random number SR5-1 extracted in step S526 in FIG. 50, the decision is made by selecting the notice pattern YP1-1.

  Based on these determination results, in the process of step S506 shown in FIG. 49, the symbol variation control pattern CPT1-2 corresponding to the variation pattern PT1-2 is read from the symbol variation control pattern table 168A as shown in FIG. As well as being set, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-1 are read from the notice effect control pattern table 168B as shown in FIG. Set. When the variation pattern PT1-2 is designated, since it is predetermined to switch to the sudden effect when the button operation is detected, the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-1 is the notice effect. Only the effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 may be read from the notice effect control pattern table 168B and set.

  In the example shown in FIG. 56 (B), as in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 56 (A), the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is performed after all the symbol fluctuations are started. When such a button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is executed, the operation valid period K1 is entered, and the operation by the operation button 30 is detected effectively. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (B), when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected at the timing when 5000 milliseconds [ms] has elapsed from the start of all symbol variations (button operation detection), the button operation is performed. At the detection timing, the effect switching timing is reached, and the effect operation similar to the variation pattern PA1-1 is switched to the sudden effect. Subsequently, a sudden effect is executed for 4000 milliseconds [ms], and a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed during the execution of the sudden effect. As a result, when the sudden effect is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed. After the sudden effect is completed in this manner, in the variation pattern PT1-2, the fixed decorative pattern is displayed in a temporary stop state from the execution of the sudden effect until the variable display time of 12000 milliseconds [ms] has elapsed (all symbols). Temporary stop display). As a result, in the variation pattern PT1-2, after the fixed decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed during the execution of the sudden effect, the fixed decorative symbol is displayed until the variable display time has elapsed even after the sudden effect ends. Continue. Thereafter, in response to the elapse of the variable display time or the reception of the decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11, the decorative symbol display portion 5L for “left”, “middle”, and “right” is displayed. 5C and 5R are all stopped and displayed (determined) as a finalized decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol.

  FIGS. 57A, 57B, and 57E to 57H show examples of effect operations by the variation pattern PT1-2 and the notice pattern YP1-1. In the variation pattern PT1-2, first, all symbol variations as shown in FIG. 57 (A) are started, and then, as in the case of the variation pattern PA1-1, the notice pattern YP1 as shown in FIG. 57 (B). -1 button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is performed. When the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, the detection timing becomes the effect switching timing, and the switching to the sudden effect as shown in FIGS. 57 (E) to (H) is performed. Is called. Then, when the sudden effect as shown in FIG. 57 (H) is finished, it becomes a state where a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed. Thereafter, until the variable display time elapses, the fixed decorative symbol is displayed in a temporarily stopped state, thereby continuing the derivation display of the fixed decorative symbol.

  FIG. 56C shows a time schedule when an operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation valid period as another example of the time schedule assigned to the variation pattern PT1-2. In the example shown in FIG. 56C, after the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is executed and the operation valid period K1 is reached, the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected and 7500 milliseconds from the start of all symbol variations. When [ms] elapses, the operation valid period K1 ends (no button operation is detected). In this case, when the operation valid period K1 ends, the execution of the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 may be ended. Thus, after the operation valid period K1 ends, the effect operation switches to the sudden effect. The effect switching timing at which the sudden effect is switched is not limited to the timing after the operation effective period K1 ends, and may be the same timing as the operation effective period K1 ends. Subsequently, a sudden effect is executed for 4000 milliseconds [ms], and a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed during the execution of the sudden effect. In this case, the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination derived and displayed during the execution of the sudden effect is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 500 milliseconds [ms]), and is variable when the sudden effect ends. As the display time elapses, the decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is completely stopped (determined).

  FIG. 58 shows an example of the progress of the rendering operation from the start to the end of the decorative pattern variable display in the variation pattern PT1-2 and variation pattern PT1-3 in which the sudden effect is executed after the button operation promotion effect is performed. It is a flowchart to show. Each process shown in FIG. 58 is based on the symbol variation control pattern and the notice effect control pattern determined by executing the processing in step S506 shown in FIG. 49, for example, and the decorative symbol variation process in step S162 shown in FIG. 51, the process of step S544 shown in FIG. 51 may be executed, or the decoration symbol change end process of step S163 shown in FIG. 48 may be executed.

  In the processing shown in FIG. 58, for example, all symbol variations in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5 are used. Is started (step ST11). Thereafter, a button operation promotion effect is performed based on various control data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the notice control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value (step ST12). For example, in the variation pattern PT1-2, the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is executed by the notice pattern YP1-1. Further, in the variation pattern PT1-3, the button operation promotion effect BN2-1 is executed by the notice pattern YP2-1 that executes the notice effect as the “monitor notice”.

  When the button operation promotion effect is started in step ST12, it becomes an operation effective period, and the operation action on the operation button 30 by the player is detected effectively (step ST13). The timing when the button operation promotion effect is started and the timing when the operation is valid may be the same timing or different timings. As an example, after the button operation promotion effect is started, after the effect display indicating the countdown operation such as “3” → “2” → “1” is performed, and the operation valid period is set, the button operation promotion effect is started. The timing may be different from the start timing of the operation effective period. Thereafter, for example, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has ended based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern or the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, or the effect control process timer value itself. (Step ST14). For example, if the end of the operation valid period is indicated in the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern or the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, the detection of the operation on the operation button 30 is invalidated, and the operation What is necessary is just to end an effective period. Alternatively, the operation effective period may be ended when the effect control process timer value matches a predetermined operation effective period end determination value. If the operation valid period has not expired in step ST14 (step ST14; No), it is determined whether or not a button operation is detected, for example, by checking an operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30. (Step ST15). If no button operation is detected in step ST15 (step ST15; No), the process returns to step ST14.

  When the operation valid period ends in step ST14 (step ST14; Yes), or when it is determined in step ST15 that button operation is detected (step ST15; Yes), the effect operation is switched to the sudden effect, The execution of the sudden effect is started (step ST16). When the sudden effect is finished, all symbol derivation display for deriving and displaying the decorative symbols on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R is performed (step ST17). . As a result, the decorative symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed. Thereafter, for example, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has passed based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value or the effect control process timer value itself (step ST18). If the variable display time has not elapsed in step ST18 (step ST18; No), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display is made (step ST19), and the process returns to step ST18. Thereby, until the variable display time elapses, the decorative symbol derivation display performed in step ST17 is continued. On the other hand, if the variable display time has elapsed in step ST18 (step ST18; Yes), the decorative symbols are displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. By displaying the complete stop (step ST20), the variable display of the decorative symbols by the variation pattern PT1-2 and the variation pattern PT1-3 is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the sudden jackpot variation pattern having a short variable display time is prepared as compared with the total effect jackpot variation pattern. In the sudden big hit variation pattern, for example, after all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” start variable display of the decorative symbols, The production operation is performed in the same manner as described above, and the production operation is switched to a sudden production that is different from the overall production big hit variation pattern at the production switching timing determined corresponding to each variation pattern. After that, when the sudden effect ends, the player can recognize that the variable display result will be a “hit” in a shorter time than the all-effects big hit variation pattern by deriving and displaying a decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination. It becomes like this. As a result, the unexpectedness of the variable display result being “big hit” can be improved, and the game entertainment can be improved. For example, in the above embodiment, the execution time of the sudden effect is set in advance to be 4000 milliseconds [ms], which is shorter than the execution time of the reach effect that is executed for all effects or complete effects. . Therefore, for example, when the player can recognize that the variable display result is “big hit” by starting the sudden effect such as the timing of switching the effect to switch to the sudden effect, the confirmation of the actual big hit combination There is no delay in the period until the variable display result becomes “big hit” because the symbol is derived and displayed.

  In addition, as the effect switching timing at which the sudden hit variation pattern switches to the sudden effect, the timing before the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach display state is determined in advance. As a result, after the variable display of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is a jackpot combination is derived by switching to the sudden effect over the entire period from the start of the display of the decorative design that results in the variable display. Since there is a possibility of being displayed, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” throughout the period can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “line notice,” “monitor notice,” and “step-up notice” are set to be executable as the notice effect that becomes the “reach notice effect”. For example, in the variation pattern PT1-1 to variation pattern PT1-3, the “reach notice effect” is set based on the notice pattern type determined in step S523 of FIG. 50 or the notice pattern determined in step S527. A notice effect may be executed. In this case, the effect switching timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed is included in the timing (period) for executing the notice effect as the “reach notice effect”. In this way, the notice effect that becomes the “reach notice effect” is switched to the sudden effect when the notice effect that becomes the “reach notice effect” is executed, and the notice effect that becomes the “reach notice effect” is executed by deriving and displaying the decorative pattern of the jackpot combination. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the unexpectedness and expectation that the variable display result sometimes becomes a “hit”.

  For example, in the variation pattern PT1-4, variation pattern PT2-3, variation pattern PT2-5, etc., the effect switching timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed is included in the timing (period) for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. Will be. In this way, by switching to the sudden effect at the timing when the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” is executed, the decorative display of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed so that the variable display is performed when the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” is executed. It is possible to improve the fun of the game by increasing the unexpectedness and expectation that the result will be a “hit”.

  For example, in the variation pattern PT2-1 or the like, the effect switching timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed is included in the timing (period) during the mission start effect in which the mission start effect is being executed. In this way, by switching to the sudden effect at the timing of the mission start effect and deriving and displaying the big hit combination decoration pattern, when the mission start effect is executed, the variable display result becomes “big hit” The expectation can be raised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  For example, in the variation pattern PT1-5 or the like, the effect switching timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed is included in the timing (period) during the sudden mode start effect in which the sudden mode start effect is being executed. In this way, by switching to the sudden effect at the timing during the start of the surprise mode start and deriving and displaying the decorative pattern of the jackpot combination, the variable display result is unexpectedly “big hit” when the sudden mode start effect is executed You can improve the fun and fun of the game by increasing the nature and expectations.

  For example, in the variation pattern PT1-2, the variation pattern PT1-3, and the like, the operation effective period in which the operation of the operation button 30 is effectively detected when the button operation promotion effect is executed after all the symbol variations are started. When an operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period, switching to the sudden effect is performed at the timing when the button operation is detected. In this way, when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, the effect is switched to the sudden effect, and the decorative display of the big hit combination is derived and displayed, so that when the operation button 30 is operated, the variable display result is “big hit”. It is possible to improve the effect of the game by enhancing the production effect due to the unexpectedness.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern PT1-2, variation pattern PT1-3, etc., when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation effective period, switching to the sudden effect is performed after the operation effective period ends. . Thereby, even if the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected, the player can surely recognize that the variable display result is “big hit” by switching to the sudden effect at an appropriate timing, It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the decorative pattern of the big hit combination is not derived and displayed.

  For example, an effect operation that becomes a button operation promotion effect in the variation pattern PT1-2, the variation pattern PT1-3, or the like is executed by the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 executed by the notice pattern YP1-1 or the notice pattern YP2-1. The button operation promotion effect BN2-1 is executed and can be executed as a notice effect even when the variation pattern is different from the sudden big hit variation pattern. As a result, the player switches to a sudden effect at the scene that the player recognizes as performing the notice effect, and by deriving and displaying the decorative pattern of the jackpot combination, the unexpectedness that the variable display result becomes `` hit '', The interest of the game can be improved.

  The process of determining the variation pattern type in step S271 shown in FIG. 44 and the process of determining the variation pattern in step S274 are executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. On the other hand, the process of determining the notice pattern type in step S523 shown in FIG. 50 and the process of determining the notice pattern in step S527 are executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. As a result, it is possible to execute various notice effects while preventing an increase in the control burden on the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in order to execute the effect operation as the notice effect. You can improve the fun of the game.

  In the setting of the notice pattern classification determination table 166 shown in FIG. 31, the effect form until the sudden effect is executed is the same, and for a plurality of variation patterns with different presence or absence of the sudden effect, the presence or absence of the notice effect and each notice pattern The allocation of the random number SR4 for determining the notice pattern type for the type is the same. Also, in the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A shown in FIG. 32 and the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167B shown in FIG. 33, the effect modes until the sudden effect is executed are the same, and the presence or absence of the sudden effect is different. As for the fluctuation pattern, the allocation of the random number value SR5-1 for determining the first warning pattern and the random value SR5-2 for determining the second warning pattern are the same for each of the warning patterns. . For this reason, the ratio of determining whether or not to perform a presentation operation that becomes a notice effect corresponding to each notice pattern does not depend on whether or not the switch to the sudden effect is performed, and the effect that the switch to the sudden effect is performed. It differs depending on the switching timing. In addition, depending on the effect switching timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed, the determination ratio of the effect operations to be a plurality of types of the notice effects such as “line notice”, “monitor notice”, and “step-up notice” will be different. . Thereby, according to the production | presentation operation | movement performed as a notice production | presentation, the expectation whether it changes to a sudden production | production effect can be varied, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  For example, in the case of the variation pattern PT1-2, the notice pattern type CY1 is determined regardless of the notice pattern type determination random number SR4 by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 166 shown in FIG. By referring to the notice pattern determination table 167A shown, the notice pattern YP1-1 is determined regardless of the random number SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern. In contrast, for example, in the case of the variation pattern PT1-1, the notice pattern type CY1 is determined according to the random value SR4 for determining the notice pattern type by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 166 shown in FIG. In some cases, the notice pattern YP1-1 may be determined according to the random number SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern by referring to the notice pattern determination table 167A shown in FIG. In this manner, even when the variation pattern is different from the variation pattern that switches to the sudden effect when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, the effect operation that becomes the notice effect including the button operation promotion effect is executed at a predetermined determination rate. Decided to do. Thereby, the expectation to switch to the sudden effect when the effect operation as the notice effect is executed can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the setting of the big hit variation pattern determination table 139B shown in FIG. 20A, the variation for executing the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” according to which of the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3. The allocation of the random value MR5 to the pattern is different from each other. Therefore, the determination ratio of the number of executions of the re-variable display operation in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” varies depending on the effect switching timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the expectation of when to switch to the sudden effect according to the number of executions of the re-variable display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous”. .

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167C shown in FIG. 34, the ratio determined as any one of the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4 is varied according to the effect switching timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed. As described above, the random number SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern is assigned to each notice pattern according to each variation pattern. Thus, at any timing, switching to the sudden effect is performed according to the number of times of performing the effect operation switching (the number of times of switching) in the notice effect that becomes the “step-up notice” or the effect mode in the effect operation performed after the change. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the sense of expectation.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A, 135B, 135D, and 135E, the total number of reserved storages is within any range of “0” to “2”, “3” to “5”, and “6” to “8”. The variation pattern type so that the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern in which the sudden effect is executed and the proportion determined for each of the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 are different. A random number value MR4 for determination is assigned to each variation pattern type. Thereby, according to the total number of stored memory that is the total number of stored data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, the sudden big hit variation pattern is selected at a different selection ratio, It is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the sense of expectation to switch to the sudden production.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above-described embodiment, in the variation pattern type setting table 140 shown in FIG. 9, the variation pattern type CA4-1 of “sudden short”, the variation pattern type CA4-2 of “sudden middle”, and “sudden long” It has been described that a plurality of types of variation pattern types are set so as to include the variation pattern types CA4-3. However, the plurality of types of variation patterns may be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As an example, one variation pattern type including all of the sudden jackpot variation patterns for executing sudden effects may be provided. In this case, by determining the variation pattern type in step S271 shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not to execute the sudden effect, and in step S274, the sudden effect is executed by determining the variation pattern. In this case, the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect is determined.

  In the above embodiment, the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 15A, the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. 15B, and the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 135D shown in FIG. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135E shown in FIG. 16B, it has been described that the random number MR4 is assigned differently to a plurality of types of variation pattern types in accordance with the total number of reserved storage. That is, in the above embodiment, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, and the jackpot type is “normal” and “probable change” based on the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. When it is determined to be any of the above, it has been described that the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern is made different according to the total number of reserved memories. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic state or a short-time state, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern may be varied according to the total number of reserved memory. Good. Further, when either one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern is made different according to the total reserved memory number, whereas when the other is satisfied, the total reserved memory number The sudden big hit variation pattern may be selected at a rate that does not depend on.

  In the above embodiment, the description has been made assuming that the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern varies depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sudden big hit variation pattern may be selected at a rate that does not depend on the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the above embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, the variation pattern type CA4-1 of “sudden short”, the variation pattern of “sudden middle” The ratio determined as either the type CA4-2 or the variation pattern type CA4-3 of “suddenly long” is varied. Thereby, the determination ratio of the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect is varied depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is. In addition to this, or separately from this, the ratio determined as one of a plurality of types of sudden big hit variation patterns differs depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a plurality of types. You may make it let. As an example, when the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 is determined in step S271 shown in FIG. 44, the variation pattern determination table set in step S272 shown in FIG. Depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a plurality of types, it may be made different. In the variation pattern determination table used at this time, the allocation of the variation pattern random number MR5 for each variation pattern may be different depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states in the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

  In the above embodiment, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probabilistic state, if the big hit type is “normal”, the sudden big hit variation pattern is not selected, while the big hit type is “probable”. In the case described above, the sudden big hit fluctuation pattern can be selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state, as in the case of the probable variation state, when the jackpot type is “normal” While the sudden big hit fluctuation pattern is not selected, when the big hit type is “probable change”, the sudden big hit fluctuation pattern may be selectable. Alternatively, even when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state, the sudden big hit variation pattern can be selected even if the big hit type is “normal”, but the big hit type is “probable change”. In comparison, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern may be lowered. As described above, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern may be made different depending on whether the big hit type is determined as “normal” or “probable change”. In the above embodiment, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state or a short time state, the presence or absence of a sudden effect (probability change) depends on whether the jackpot type is determined as “normal” or “probable change”. In the case of a state), a variation pattern type CA4-1 of “Sudden Short”, a variation pattern type CA4-2 of “Sudden Middle”, and a variation pattern type CA4-3 of “Sudden Long” ( In the case of short time). Thereby, the effect switching timing at which the sudden effect is switched is made different depending on whether the big hit type is determined to be “normal” or “probability change”. In addition to this, or separately, depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be “normal” or “probability”, the ratio determined to one of a plurality of types of sudden jackpot fluctuation patterns, You may make it differ. As an example, when the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 is determined in step S271 shown in FIG. 44, the variation pattern determination table set in step S272 shown in FIG. Depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be “normal” or “probable change”, it may be different. In the variation pattern determination table used at this time, if the allocation of the variation pattern random number MR5 for each variation pattern differs depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be “normal” or “probable variation” Good.

  In the above embodiment, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern is varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. Explained as a thing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, either the first start condition or the second start condition is the same as when the probability change state or the short time state. The sudden big hit variation pattern may be selected at a rate that does not depend on whether or not is established. Alternatively, even when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic state or a short time state, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern is varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. You may do it. In the above embodiment, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the “sudden short” variation pattern type CA4- according to which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. 1. The ratio determined as one of the “sudden middle” variation pattern type CA4-2 and the “sudden long” variation pattern type CA4-3 is different. Thereby, the determination ratio of the effect switching timing at which the sudden effect is switched is varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. In addition to this, or separately from this, the ratio determined for any one of a plurality of types of sudden big hit fluctuation patterns is different depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. You may make it let. As an example, when the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 is determined in step S271 shown in FIG. 44, the variation pattern determination table set in step S272 shown in FIG. Depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, it may be made different. In the variation pattern determination table used at this time, the allocation of the variation pattern random number MR5 for each variation pattern may be different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. .

  In the embodiment described above, the button operation promotion effect is executed in the notice effect that becomes the “line notice” and the notice effect that becomes the “monitor notice”, and then the operation of the operation button 30 is detected once within the operation effective period. Correspondingly, the effect mode of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is switched once by switching the notice effect control pattern once. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect mode of the effect operation as the notice effect may be switched a plurality of times in response to the operation of the operation button 30 being detected a plurality of times. As an example, in the notice pattern YP1-2, after the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is executed, when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, the notice effect is executed so that the effect operation that becomes the line YN1-1 is executed. The control pattern or the like may be switched, and when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, the notice effect control pattern or the like may be switched so as to execute the effect operation that becomes the line YN1-2. In this case, the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 and the effect mode are started when a predetermined time elapses after starting the effect operation becoming the serif YN1-1 or starting the effect operation becoming the serif YN1-1. The same or separate button operation promotion effect may be performed to detect the operation of the operation button 30 effectively. And as the sudden big hit fluctuation pattern that switches to the sudden effect at the timing when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, the fluctuation pattern that switches to the sudden effect using the timing at which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected once as the effect switching timing, and Alternatively, a variation pattern may be prepared in advance so that the timing at which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected a plurality of times is switched to the sudden effect as the effect switching timing.

  In the above embodiment, the button similar to the notice effect that is executed before the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display mode as the sudden hit variation pattern that switches to the sudden effect at the timing when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected. It has been described that a variation pattern is provided in which the timing at which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected after the operation promotion effect is executed is switched to the sudden effect as the effect switching timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected after the button operation promotion effect is executed in the reach effect executed after the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display mode. A variation pattern for switching to the sudden effect as the effect switching timing may be prepared in advance. In this case, as the button operation promotion effect executed in the reach effect, for example, an effect operation for selecting an effect mode of the reach effect that becomes a super reach that develops from the normal reach, or a change proceeds after the reach effect is started. It is only necessary to set in advance such that an effect operation for targeting the decorative symbols being made to be a big hit combination can be executed.

  In the embodiment described above, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 executes the processes of steps S501 to S506 shown in FIG. 49, so that the presence or absence of the mission start effect, the content of the mission, the final stop symbol, The temporary stop symbol, the presence / absence of the notice effect, the notice pattern, the effect control pattern, etc. have been described as being determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence / absence of a mission start effect, the contents of a mission, and the final stop pattern by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the effect operation, for example. The temporary stop symbol, the presence / absence of the notice effect, the notice pattern, the determination of the effect control pattern, etc. may be shared and executed.

  As an example, a display control board 16 as shown in FIG. 59 is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. On the display control board 16, a display control CPU 180, a ROM 181, a RAM 182, a random number circuit 183, and an I / O 184 are mounted. In this case, since the display control CPU 180 mounted on the display control board 16 executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The displayed control unit 123 may not be provided. In the display control board 16, for example, the display control CPU 180 executes a program read from the ROM 181, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU 180 reads fixed data from the ROM 181, the display control CPU 180 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 182 and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU 180 loads the RAM 182 into the RAM 182. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading various temporarily stored data, receiving operation for the display control CPU 180 to receive input of various signals from the outside of the display control board 16 via the I / O 184, and the display control CPU 180 for the I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board 16 via the O184 is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU 180 performs steps S501 to S506 shown in FIG. 49 based on, for example, a display control command from the effect control board 12 or an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12. By executing all or part of the processing, at least the presence / absence of the mission start effect, the content of the mission, the final stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol, the presence / absence of the notice effect, the notice pattern, the determination of the effect control pattern, etc. A part may be executed. Alternatively, the display control CPU 180 executes all or part of the processes in steps S160 to S165 shown in FIG. 48 to display the effect image on the image display device 5 including the variable display of the decorative symbols. You may make it control production | movement operation by. The display control CPU 180 may execute any part of the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. The sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal and an electrical decoration signal from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Further, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12 so that independent control to be the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In the above-described embodiment, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are not equipped with a microcomputer including a control CPU and the like, but the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. Thus, processing for controlling various effects such as output control of sound and sound effects and lighting control of lamps, decoration LEDs, and the like is performed. On the other hand, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the processing executed by the CPU 120 for effect control in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is performed. Any part of them may be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like, is executed on any control board. Any combination may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” can be executed during variable display of decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect operation that is another specific effect such as a specific effect of “slip” may be set to be executable. Here, in the specific effect of “slip”, two or more decorative symbols are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols on the display unit (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display units 5L, 5R, etc.), a predetermined number (for example, “1” of the decorative symbol display units temporarily displayed. ”Or“ 2 ”) in the decorative symbol display part (for example, either or both of the“ left ”decorative symbol display part 5L and the“ right ”decorative symbol display part 5R) By displaying, the effect display which changes the decorative design to be stopped is performed. In this case, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “slip” is prepared in advance. When the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern in step S274 in FIG. 44, for example, among a plurality of types of specific effects such as a “sliding” specific effect and a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. Which specific effect is to be executed may be determined. Further, when a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “slip” is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the temporary stop symbol determination table prepared in advance in step S504 of FIG. Thus, the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed with the specific effect of “slip” may be determined based on the final stop symbol determined in step S505, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value, or the like. It should be noted that the specific effects such as “pseudo-run” and “slip” and the sudden effects have different effects on the effects. In other words, specific effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “sliding” indicate that the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a reach display state, and that the variable display result may be a “big hit”. This is an effect operation for notifying the player by the variable display mode of the decorative design, etc. When these specific effects are performed, the variable display result may be “big hit”, Instead, it may become a “losing”. On the other hand, the sudden effect is started when the effect switching timing is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”. It is a production operation, and when a sudden production is performed, the variable display result is always “big hit”.

  In the above-described embodiment, the button operation promotion effects BN1-1 to BN1-5 executed corresponding to each of the notice pattern YP1-1 to the notice pattern YP1-5 are different from each other. The production operation may be a production operation that becomes a common production mode. In addition, a part of the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 to button operation promotion effect BN1-5 may include an effect operation that is a common effect mode. Further, the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 to the button operation promotion effect BN1-5 executed corresponding to each of the notice pattern YP1-1 to the notice pattern YP1-5, and the notice pattern YP2-1 to the notice pattern YP2-5. The button operation promotion effects BN2-1 to the button operation promotion effects BN2-5 that are executed in response to each of them may be effect operations that are different from each other, and each is a common effect mode It may be a production operation. In addition, the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 to part of the button operation promotion effect BN1-5 and the button operation promotion effect BN2-1 to part of the button operation promotion effect BN2-5 are effect operations that become a common effect mode. May be included. Then, as the button operation promotion effect, in the case where an effect operation that is a common effect mode is performed, the operation of the operation button 30 is detected after the button operation promotion effect is executed in the common effect mode. Thus, the notice effect having a different effect mode is executed according to the notice pattern. Therefore, the player can recognize the jackpot reliability of the notice effect for the first time by operating the operation button 30. In addition, in the case of setting a plurality of types of effect modes of button operation promotion effect, the correspondence between the effect mode in the button operation promotion effect and the effect operation for informing the lines and the effect operation for causing the character to appear in the monitor, It is not necessary to have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, after performing an effect operation that becomes the button operation promotion effect BN1-1, the dialogue YN1-1 may be executed, or the dialogue YN1-2 may be executed. Alternatively, when the effect operation that becomes the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is executed, the effect operation that becomes the button operation promotion effect BN1-2 (the effect mode is different from the button operation promotion effect BN1-1) is executed. In any case, the line YN1-1 may be executable.

  In the above embodiment, the “step-up notice” is made by changing the ratio determined to any one of the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4 according to the effect switching timing at which the changeover to the sudden effect is performed. The number of steps in the notice effect is determined as one of a plurality of steps at a different determination ratio depending on the effect switching timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the effect mode in the effect operation that becomes the notice effect can be changed a plurality of times step by step, the number of changes in the effect mode is changed at different determination ratios depending on the effect switching timing. What is necessary is just to determine to any of a plurality of types. Here, as the notice effect that can change the effect mode a plurality of times stepwise, for example, the effect that the displayed characters increase stepwise or the operation of the displayed characters changes stepwise Any directing action may be used.

  In the above embodiment, when the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” and the sudden effect is not executed, when the change pattern type is determined in step S271 shown in FIG. 44, either reach of normal reach or super reach is reached. 44. When determining whether to execute an effect and determining the variation pattern in step S274 shown in FIG. 44, it has been described that it is determined which of the reach effects is to be executed among the super reach α and the super reach β. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the variation pattern type is determined in step S271 shown in FIG. 44, it is determined which one of a plurality of types of reach effects is to be executed. Good. As an example, as a variation pattern type when the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” and the sudden effect is not executed, it corresponds to each of multiple types of reach effects such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β. The variation pattern type is set in advance. Then, in step S271 shown in FIG. 44, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types, so that it is determined which of the reach effects is executed among normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β. You can do it.

  Further, when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”, when the variation pattern type is determined in step S271 shown in FIG. 44, the reach effect of either normal reach or super reach is executed. 44. When determining the fluctuation pattern in step S274 shown in FIG. 44, it is also possible to determine which reach effect is to be executed among the reach effects that are a plurality of types of super reach. Good. As an example, when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”, the variation pattern type for normal reach and super reach is a separate variation pattern type, but is super reach α? Regardless of whether it is super reach β, it is set in advance so that it becomes a common variation pattern type. In other words, both the variation pattern for executing the reach effect that becomes the super reach α and the variation pattern that executes the reach effect that becomes the super reach β may be associated in advance with the variation pattern type of “super reach”. Then, in step S271 shown in FIG. 44, the change pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types, thereby determining which reach effect is to be executed among normal reach and super reach. By determining the fluctuation pattern in S274, it may be determined which one of the reach effects of the super reach α and the super reach β is to be executed.

  In the above embodiment, in the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type for the jackpot type of “surprise” Was described as not being assigned. For this reason, the variable display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern classified into the dedicated variation pattern type only when the big hit type is “surprise”, such as the variation pattern type CA5-1 or the variation pattern type CA5-2, is the first special display. While the game may be performed corresponding to the special game using the first special graphic in the symbol display device 4A, the game is performed corresponding to the special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. It will never be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “surprising”. Good. In this case, depending on whether the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the number of random value MR2 for determining the big hit type assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” is made different. A case where the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition; and a case where the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition; Thus, the ratio at which the big hit type is determined to be “accurate” may be varied. In this case, the variable display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern classified into the dedicated variation pattern type only when the big hit type is “surprise”, such as the variation pattern type CA5-1 and the variation pattern type CA5-2, The game may be performed corresponding to a special game using either the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. That is, when the variation special figure designation buffer value can be set to “surprise” corresponding to both “1” and “2”, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol A common variation pattern can be used when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. For the variation pattern type, if the table data of the variation pattern type determination table is configured to include a common variation pattern type when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. Good. As a result, when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, it is possible to determine a common variation pattern type. Regardless of which of the second start conditions is satisfied, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice pattern type in step S523 shown in FIG. 50, the notice pattern type including the presence or absence of the notice effect is determined, and then the notice is notified in step S527. In the case of determining the pattern, it has been described that the notification pattern is determined on the assumption that the notification effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of the notice effect, the type of the notice pattern and the decision of the notice pattern may be determined in a single process. If it is determined that there is an effect, the type of the notice effect may be determined. Alternatively, when the notice pattern is determined in step S527, the notice pattern may be determined including the presence or absence of the notice effect.

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines the final stop symbol that will be the reach-losing combination in step S503 shown in FIG. 49, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R are aligned. The decorative symbols to be stopped are determined, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. The description has been made assuming that the symbol difference from the symbol is also determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, the decorative symbol display unit 5C stops and displays the decorative symbols, and the left and right decorative symbol display units 5L and 5R display the stop symbols. For example, the CPU 103 may determine the design difference from the decorative design on the main board 11 side along with the determination of the variation pattern, and notify the effect control board 12 side by a predetermined effect control command.

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines the final stop symbols to be a non-reach combination in step S503 shown in FIG. 49, the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left and right outcome determination table 161 are stored. With reference to the above description, it is assumed that the determined decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display units 5L, 5C, and 5R are individually determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after determining the final decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, the determined decorative symbol and the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display units are displayed. You may make it determine the symbol difference with the fixed decoration symbol in 5C, 5R with reference to a predetermined | prescribed determination table.

  In the above embodiment, as the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 41, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44 is executed regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. It was explained as a thing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, a process different from each other is executed, and the variation pattern type is selected from a plurality of types. It is also possible to determine whether or not one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In this case, the process for determining the variation pattern type and the process for determining the variation pattern are varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the variation pattern type The numerical data indicating the random number value SR4 for determination and the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 for determining the variation pattern are common numerical data regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. May be used.

  For example, as a variation pattern type determination table such as a big hit variation pattern type determination table, a reach loss variation pattern type determination table, or a non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table, depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, You may prepare beforehand what changed the allocation of random value SR4 for the variation pattern type determination with respect to each variation pattern type. Then, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the first start condition, a variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition is selected as a use table, and a random value for determining the variation pattern type Based on SR4, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the second start condition, a variation pattern type determination table that is different from the case where the first start condition is established according to the establishment of the second start condition. It may be selected as a usage table and the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types based on the random value SR4 for determining the variation pattern type common to the case where the first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, regarding the determination processing for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state, different processing is executed when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. It may be. In this case, the process for determining whether or not to reach the reach state is made different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the numerical data indicating the reach determination random value MR3 is Regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the common numerical data may be used. Further, for example, in place of the processing in step S253 shown in FIG. 43A in the above embodiment, the first start condition is satisfied as the processing for determining one of the multiple types of jackpot types and 2 Different processing may be executed when the start condition is satisfied. In this case, the process for determining the big hit type is different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is Regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the common numerical data may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and is controlled to the two round big hit state. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate”, or in addition to this case, the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “ A case where the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” may be provided. In this case, the first and second special figure display result determination tables 130A and 130B assign the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result to the small hit determination value data corresponding to the variable display result of “small hit”. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that data may be included. Alternatively, in the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the random number value MR1 is assigned to the small hit determination value data, while in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the random number MR1 is not assigned to the small hit determination value data. Thus, when the special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the variable display result may not be “small hit”. The jackpot type determination table 131 is configured to include table data for assigning the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type to the jackpot type of “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” according to the special figure designation buffer value. It only has to be done.

  Then, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the variable winning operation for opening the big winning opening is performed as a two-time open game in the same manner as the two round big hit state. After the variable winning operation is completed, the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continued, and the gaming state is not changed. As a result, even if the player recognizes that an open game will be performed twice, the player's expectation on whether or not the game will be in a probable state after the end of the two-time open game is increased, and the gaming interest is improved. be able to.

  Also, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly short”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state in the same way as the big hit type is “surprising”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type becomes “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “Accuracy”, the normal state is controlled. As a result, even if the player can recognize that the player will be in the 2-round jackpot state, the player's expectation for the gaming state controlled after the end of the two-round jackpot state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the game state such as the probability change state or the time-short state can be controlled after the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “big hit”. In the probability variation state and the short-time state, it is described that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening and easily establishing the second start condition. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state, the probability variation control is continuously performed, and the advantageous release control that increases the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening is performed. The high base state and the high probability low base state in which the probability variation control is performed but the advantageous release control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened and advantageous opening control is performed, and a low-accuracy low-base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened but advantageous opening control is not performed. May be included. As an example, depending on whether the big hit type is "probability change" or "surprise", after the big hit gaming state is finished, it is controlled to either the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state. May be. As another example, depending on whether the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise”, the ratio that is controlled to either the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends , They may be different from each other.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch 23 ... Count switch 24 ... Operation detection switch 30 ... Operation button 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (3)

After the variable display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the variable display device variably displaying each of a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified becomes a predetermined specific display result, a specific gaming state advantageous to the player is obtained. A gaming machine to control,
Pre-decision means for deciding whether to control to the specific gaming state before the variable display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
A variable display pattern storage means for storing a variable display pattern of multiple,
On the basis of the predetermination means by that determination result to a variable display pattern selecting means you select one of the plurality of variable display pattern,
Effect execution means for executing an effect operation corresponding to the variable display pattern selected by the variable display pattern selection means,
The plurality of variable display pattern stored before Symbol variable display pattern memory means,
All production jackpot variable display patterns that derive and display specific display results after reaching the reach state,
At predetermined effect switching timing in the variable display in the previous SL identification information, the specific effect different from the effect operation by the total effect jackpot variable display pattern from the effect operation the same effect operation by all effect jackpot variable display pattern switched, contains a sudden jackpot variable display pattern for displaying deriving the specific display results,
The sudden big hit variable display pattern includes a pre-reach sudden big hit variable display pattern that becomes the effect switching timing before the reach state is reached, and a post-reach sudden big hit variable display pattern that becomes the effect change timing after the reach state is reached. There are multiple sudden big hit variable display patterns, including
The specific game state includes at least a first specific game state and a second specific game state that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state,
When the variable display by the sudden big hit variable display pattern is executed, the second specific gaming state is controlled at a higher rate than when the variable display by the all effect big hit variable display pattern is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that. It has operating means that can be operated by the player,
The effect executing means switches to the specific effect at a timing when the operation means is operated within the operation effective period during the operation promotion effect by the sudden big hit variable display pattern, and when the specific effect ends. The derivation display of the specific display result is continued until the variable display time of the identification information by the predetermined sudden hit variable display pattern elapses.
The gaming machine according to claim 1. Comprising a notice effect execution means for executing a notice effect for notifying the possibility of being controlled to the specific gaming state;
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that.

Images